diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
index a6275e7ad9..5c86872e79 100644
--- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
@@ -1137,7 +1137,7 @@ MAT	16	11	i7x6	figs-metaphor	τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων κα
 MAT	16	12	f73l	writing-pronouns	συνῆκαν	1	they understood	The pronoun **they** refers to the disciples. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 MAT	16	13	e5cm	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Connecting Statement:	Jesus is using the word translated **now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
 MAT	16	13	e1jh	figs-123person	τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	the Son of Man	Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-MAT	16	16	n5wi	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος	1	the Son of the living God	ddddddd**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+MAT	16	16	n5wi	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος	1	the Son of the living God	**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 MAT	16	16	r1h7	figs-explicit	τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος	1	of the living God	Here, Peter uses the phrase **living God** to speaking about God as if he is alive. This is to contrast God as the only true God with the other gods who are not real. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the only true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 MAT	16	17	yh0s	grammar-connect-logic-result	μακάριος εἶ, Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ, ὅτι σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since flesh and blood did not reveal this to you, but my Father who is in heaven, you are blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 MAT	16	17	le6a	translate-names	Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ	1	Simon Bar Jonah	The word **Bar** here is another way of saying “son of”. If it would be helpful in your language, could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “son of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
index a4c59847a6..d6ec7fd1c3 100644
--- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv
@@ -33,21 +33,21 @@ HEB	1	4	qt7q	figs-metaphor	κεκληρονόμηκεν	1	he has inherited	Here
 HEB	1	4	uu4s	figs-ellipsis	παρ’ αὐτοὺς	1		Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete comparison. He omits these words because he stated them in the first half of the comparison (a **name**). If your language needs these words to make a complete comparison, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “than their names” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	1	5	d964	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the support or basis that proves that the Son is “superior to the angels” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). The supporting statements that **For** introduces can be found in [1:5–14](../01/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support or basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is the proof for that:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	1	5	ww5h	figs-rquestion	τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων, Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν?	1	For to which of the angels did God ever say, “You are my son … a son to me”?	The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer to both is “none of them,” for God said these words to his own Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas with strong negations. Alternate translation: “For God never said to any of the angels ‘You are my son, and I today I have become your father.’ And again, ‘I will be as a father to him, and he will be as a son to me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-HEB	1	5	pzkc	writing-quotations	τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων…καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes from important texts, the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the quotations as quotations, but instead he introduces them as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md), and the second quotation comes from [2 Samuel 7:14](../../2sa/07/14.md). Since the author introduces these quotations as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce these quotations as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include footnotes or use some other form to identify the quotations. The phrase **And again** is a normal form that the author uses to connect a second quotation to a first quotation. Alternate translation: “For to which of the angels did he ever speak … And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	5	pzkc	writing-quotations	τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων…καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the quotations as quotations, but instead he introduces them as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md), and the second quotation comes from [2 Samuel 7:14](../../2sa/07/14.md). Since the author introduces these quotations as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce these quotations as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include footnotes or use some other form to identify the quotations. The phrase **And again** is a normal form that the author uses to connect a second quotation to a first quotation. Alternate translation: “For to which of the angels did he ever speak … And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	5	wmyy	figs-quotations	εἶπέν ποτε…Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν?	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “did he ever say that he was his son, that today he had fathered him, and again, that he would be as a father to him, and that he would be as a son to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	5	fdsv	translate-kinship	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε…ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν	1		In their original contexts, these two quotations referred to the king of Israel as one who became God’s **son** when he began to rule. Thus, God was his **father**. When the author applies these words not to angels but to Jesus, he identifies the **father** as God the Father and the **son** as God the Son. He does not mean that Jesus becomes **son** at some point or begins to exist at some point. Rather, he means that God the Father declares and reveals Jesus to be God the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words or a footnote that clarifies the meaning. Alternate translation: “You are my son, today I have proclaimed that I am your father … I proclaim that I am his father and that he is my son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	1	5	t48e	figs-parallelism	Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	You are my son … I have become your father	Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **son** language, and the other uses “father” language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “Today I have fathered you, my son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	1	5	wkoz	figs-yousingular	σύ…σε	1		Because the quotation is referring to one **son**, **You** and **you** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	1	5	jzhs	figs-parallelism	ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **father** language, and the other uses **son** language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “I will be as a father to him, who is my son” or “He will be as a son to me, his father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	1	6	u0km	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ πάλιν	1		Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the previous verse, which talks about what God has not said to angels. In this verse, the author identifies what God has said to angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Again, and in contrast,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-HEB	1	6	n7ph	writing-quotations	δὲ πάλιν…λέγει	1	he says	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to angels about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said to the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The phrase **But again** was a normal way in the author’s culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “Further … God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	6	n7ph	writing-quotations	δὲ πάλιν…λέγει	1	he says	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to angels about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said to the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The phrase **But again** was a normal way in the author’s culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “Further … God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	6	wnl5	figs-pastforfuture	εἰσαγάγῃ…λέγει	1		Here the author uses the present tense to introduce what God says. He may be referring to a past event (if **brings** refers to the incarnation or the ascension of Jesus) or a future event (if **brings** refers to the return of Jesus at the end). The author uses the present tense to focus on what God **says** rather than when he **says** it. Consider what tense would be appropriate for referring primarily to what a person says. Alternate translation: “he brought … he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
 HEB	1	6	llcd	figs-infostructure	ὅταν δὲ πάλιν εἰσαγάγῃ τὸν πρωτότοκον εἰς τὴν οἰκουμένην, λέγει	1		Here, the word **again** could modify: (1) **he says**. In this case, **again** tells the audience that the author is quoting an important text **again**. Alternate translation: “But, when he brings the firstborn into the world, again he says” (2) **he brings**. In this case, **again** tells the audience that the **firstborn** has already been in **the world**, and God is “bringing” him into it **again**. The “bringing” would then refer to how Jesus returns to heaven when he ascends or how he comes back again to earth at the end. Alternate translation: “But, when he again brings the firstborn into the world, he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	1	6	b4s2	figs-metaphor	τὸν πρωτότοκον	1	the firstborn	Here, the phrase **the firstborn** refers to Jesus. The author refers to him as the **firstborn** to emphasize his importance and authority over everyone else. It does not imply that there was a time before Jesus existed or that God gave birth to him at some point. Rather, it implies that Jesus has adopted siblings; they are everyone who believes in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “his honored Son” or “his first Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	1	6	lnxs		εἰς τὴν οἰκουμένην	1		Here, the phrase **the world** could refer to: (1) the “world that is coming” (see [2:5](../02/05.md)), which is heaven or the heavenly world. In this case, the verse refers to Jesus’ ascension into heaven. Alternate translation: “into the coming world” (2) this world as it currently exists. In this case, the verse refers either to Jesus’ incarnation or to his return to earth at the end. Alternate translation: “into our world”
 HEB	1	6	w5kl	figs-quotations	λέγει, καὶ προσκυνησάτωσαν αὐτῷ πάντες ἄγγελοι Θεοῦ	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he says that all the angels of God should worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	6	b6dy	figs-imperative3p	καὶ προσκυνησάτωσαν αὐτῷ πάντες ἄγγελοι Θεοῦ	1		Here the author of the quotation uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word or phrase such as “need to” or “must.” Alternate translation: “And all the angels of God need to worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
-HEB	1	7	bwuh	writing-quotations	καὶ πρὸς μὲν τοὺς ἀγγέλους λέγει	1		Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Psalm 104:4](../../psa/104/04.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The word **And** was a normal way in the author’s culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “On the one hand, with regard to the angels, God speaks,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	7	bwuh	writing-quotations	καὶ πρὸς μὲν τοὺς ἀγγέλους λέγει	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from the Greek translation of [Psalm 104:4](../../psa/104/04.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the angels, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. The word **And** was a normal way in the author’s culture to introduce another quotation. Alternate translation: “On the one hand, with regard to the angels, God speaks,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	7	acjd	figs-quotations	λέγει, ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he says that he makes his angels spirits, and his servants flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	7	urbi	figs-parallelism	ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα, καὶ τοὺς λειτουργοὺς αὐτοῦ πυρὸς φλόγα	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “The one who makes his servant angels spirits and flames of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	1	7	wqd8	writing-pronouns	ὁ ποιῶν…αὐτοῦ…αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the words **The one** and **his** refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “God makes his … his” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ HEB	1	7	isd8	figs-metaphor	ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτο
 HEB	1	7	d9yj	figs-possession	πυρὸς φλόγα	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **flames** that are made of **fire**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with an adjective such as “fiery.” Alternate translation: “fiery flames” or “flames made of fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	1	8	nk2j	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, the phrase **But on the other hand** introduces a contrast with what God said about the angels in [1:7](../01/07.md). The author contrasts the fact that God has created the angels with how the **Son** rules forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “However, on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 HEB	1	8	yp11	figs-ellipsis	πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν	1		Here, the author does not include “he says” because he used these words in the last verse ([1:7](../01/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could include “he says” here. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-HEB	1	8	p1xx	writing-quotations	πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν	1	But to the Son he says	Here and in the next verse, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 45:6–7](../psa/45/06.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about his Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	8	p1xx	writing-quotations	πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν	1	But to the Son he says	Here and in the next verse, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken about his Son. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 45:6–7](../psa/45/06.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about his Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “with regard to the Son, God speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	8	jlql		πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν	1		Here, the phrase **with regard to** could indicate that: (1) God is speaking about the **Son**. Alternate translation: “concerning the Son” (2) God is speaking directly to the **Son**. Alternate translation: “to the Son”
 HEB	1	8	b155	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τὸν Υἱόν	1	Son	The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 HEB	1	8	x9uc	figs-quotations	πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν, ὁ θρόνος σου, ὁ Θεὸς, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the following verse as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “to the Son he says that he is God and that his throne is forever and ever, and the scepter of righteousness is the scepter of his kingdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ HEB	1	9	t9yw	figs-metaphor	ἔχρισέν σε…ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιά
 HEB	1	9	w1l1	figs-possession	ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως	1		Here the quotation uses the possessive form to show that the **oil** leads to **exultation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that indicates result. Alternate translation: “with the oil that leads to exultation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	1	9	h3ne	figs-abstractnouns	ἀγαλλιάσεως	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **exultation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “exult” or “rejoice.” Alternate translation: “that makes you rejoice” or “which causes you to exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	1	9	akn8	figs-extrainfo	τοὺς μετόχους σου	1		Here the author does not clarify who the **companions** are. In the context of the quotation, they probably referred to other people in the royal family who did not become king. In the context of Hebrews, they probably refer to those who believe in Jesus. God saves them, but he does not seat them at his right hand like he does with Jesus. However, neither the quotation nor the author of Hebrews state explicitly who the **companions** are, so you should leave their identify unspecified if possible. Alternate translation: “those who are with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
-HEB	1	10	nsd4	writing-quotations	καί	1		Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He uses **And** to indicate that these are more words that God says “with regard to the Son” (see [1:8](../01/08.md)). The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 102:25–27](../psa/102/25.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “God says further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	10	nsd4	writing-quotations	καί	1		Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He uses **And** to indicate that these are more words that God says “with regard to the Son” (see [1:8](../01/08.md)). The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 102:25–27](../psa/102/25.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God has said about the Son, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “God says further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	10	pbzo	figs-quotations	καί, σὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “And further, according to the beginnings the Lord founded the earth, and the heavens are the works of his hands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	10	html	figs-parallelism	σὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί	1		This part of the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **earth** language, and the other uses **heavens** language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture, and **heavens** and **earth** together refer to everything that God made. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “according to the beginnings, O Lord, you founded the earth and the heavens” or “according to the beginnings, O Lord, you made everything, both earth and heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	1	10	yp0w	figs-yousingular	σὺ…ἐθεμελίωσας…σού	1		Since the words **you** and **your** refer to one person, the Son, **you** and **your** are singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ HEB	1	12	ncsi	figs-parallelism	σὺ…ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ, καὶ τὰ ἔ
 HEB	1	12	vg0t	figs-rpronouns	σὺ…εἶ	1		Here, the word translated **yourself** emphasizes the contrast between “they” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “it is you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 HEB	1	12	i761	translate-unknown	σὺ…ὁ αὐτὸς εἶ	1	they will be changed	Here, to be **the same** is the exact opposite of being **changed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes someone who never changes. Alternate translation: “you yourself never change” or “you yourself stay exactly as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	1	12	v5mf	figs-idiom	ἔτη σου οὐκ ἐκλείψουσιν	1	your years do not end	Here, the phrase **your years will not fail** means that a person is alive during every “year.” They will never run out of **years**, which means that they are always alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that a person never dies or always lives. Alternate translation: “your life will never end” or “you will never run out of years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-HEB	1	13	pqs9	writing-quotations	πρὸς τίνα δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἴρηκέν ποτε	1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:1](../../psa/110/01.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce the quotations as words that someone has or has not said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “But to which of the angels has he ever spoken the words (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	1	13	pqs9	writing-quotations	πρὸς τίνα δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἴρηκέν ποτε	1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:1](../../psa/110/01.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce the quotations as words that someone has or has not said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “But to which of the angels has he ever spoken the words (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	1	13	z0hn	figs-quotations	εἴρηκέν ποτε, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the question as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “has he ever said that he should sit as his right hand until he makes his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	1	13	kz68	figs-rquestion	πρὸς τίνα δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἴρηκέν ποτε, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου?	1	But to which of the angels has God said at any time … feet”?	The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “none of them,” for God only said these words to his own Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negation. See how translated the similar question in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “But God has never said to any of the angels, ‘Sit at my right hand until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	1	13	z0me	writing-pronouns	εἴρηκέν ποτε	1		Here, **he** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **he** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “has God ever said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ HEB	2	4	jsav	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, the word **his** could refer
 HEB	2	5	i3bh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	For it was not to the angels that God subjected	Here, the word **For** primarily introduces a new topic into the discussion. However, it may also indicate that what the author says about this new topic supports or gives a basis for an earlier claim. If this is so, **For** could introduce support for the claim in [2:1](../02/01.md) about the need to “give attention,” or it could introduce support for the arguments in [1:5–14](../01/05.md) about how the Son is superior to the angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	2	5	rqr9	translate-unknown	τὴν οἰκουμένην τὴν μέλλουσαν	1	the world to come	Here, the word **world** is the same word that is translated “world” in [1:6](../01/06.md), and the author probably has the same **world** in mind here. He specifies that it is **coming**, which means that humans on earth do not yet experience this **world** but will experience it some day, when Jesus comes back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in the same way you did in [1:6](../01/06.md) and include the idea that humans will someday experience this **world**. Alternate translation: “the new world that God will give us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	2	5	bztr	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, the word **we** refers to the author, who is one who “speaks.” However, the author assumed that the audience was involved in the conversation by “hearing” what he “spoke,” so he uses **we**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to just the speaker by using a pronoun such as “I.” Alternate translation: “I am speaking” or “I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-HEB	2	6	jh56	writing-quotations	διεμαρτύρατο…πού τις λέγων	1	General Information:	Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He intentionally uses vague words to introduce the quotation, and he does not identify who wrote the words or where they could be found. The quotation comes from [Psalm 8:4–6](../../psa/08/04.md). Since the author intentionally avoids giving information about where the quotation comes from, you should not include such information in your translation. If your readers would not know where the quote comes from, you could include the reference in a footnote. Alternate translation: “you can read these words in the Scriptures:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	2	6	jh56	writing-quotations	διεμαρτύρατο…πού τις λέγων	1	General Information:	Here and in the next two verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament. He intentionally uses vague words to introduce the quotation, and he does not identify who wrote the words or where they could be found. The quotation comes from [Psalm 8:4–6](../../psa/08/04.md). Since the author intentionally avoids giving information about where the quotation comes from, you should not include such information in your translation. If your readers would not know where the quote comes from, you could include the reference in a footnote. Alternate translation: “you can read these words in the Scriptures:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	2	6	m30v	figs-quotations	λέγων, τί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν?	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the floowing two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “asking about what man is that you remember, or a son of man, that you watch over him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	2	6	df5a	figs-rquestion	τί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν?	1	What is man, that you are mindful of him?	The author does not include this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he includes it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing,” for nothing about **man** or a **son of man** is significant enough for God to **remember** or **watch over** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “Man has nothing that should make you remember him, and a son of man has nothing that should make you watch over him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	2	6	mz3y	figs-parallelism	τί ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος, ὅτι μιμνῄσκῃ αὐτοῦ, ἢ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου, ὅτι ἐπισκέπτῃ αὐτόν	1		Here, the quotation includes two questions that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “What is man, that you care about him” or “What is a son of man that you remember him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ HEB	2	11	k1q5	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται	1	is not ashamed to
 HEB	2	11	h8rz	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐπαισχύνεται…καλεῖν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **ashamed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “shaming.” Alternate translation: “he does not feel shame when he calls” or “he does not worry when others shame him for calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	11	a8h9	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὺς	1	brothers	Although the word **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	2	11	gacv	translate-kinship	ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοὺς καλεῖν	1		In [2:10](../02/10.md), believers are called **sons** of God; here believers are called **brothers** of Jesus. The words **sons** and **brothers** both refer to everyone who believes, and the terms identify how believers are part of God’s family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using an analogy. Alternate translation: “to refer to them as people who are like brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
-HEB	2	12	y2es	writing-quotations	λέγων	1		Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that Jesus the Son has spoken to God about his **brothers**. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 22:22](../../psa/22/22.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the Son has spoken to God, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as you can see when he says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	2	12	y2es	writing-quotations	λέγων	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that Jesus the Son has spoken to God about his **brothers**. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 22:22](../../psa/22/22.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the Son has spoken to God, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as you can see when he says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	2	12	dtkn	figs-quotations	λέγων, ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that he will proclaim your name to his brothers; he will sing to you in the midst of the assembly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	2	12	cou1	figs-parallelism	ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε	1		Here, the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. The author of Hebrews particularly focuses on the word **brothers**, so be sure to include that term in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will sing praise to you in the midst of my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	2	12	kewm	figs-yousingular	σου…σε	1		Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ HEB	2	12	yh0b	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου	1		Althou
 HEB	2	12	bui0	translate-kinship	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου	1		Just as in [2:11](../02/11.md), the author refers to believers as **brothers** of Jesus, which identifies believers as part of God’s family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. See how you translated **brothers** in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “to the people who are like my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	2	12	tn8n	figs-explicit	ἐκκλησίας	1	from inside the assembly	Here, the audience would know that the **assembly** was a gathering to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gathering to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	2	12	qz6b	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **assembly**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “assemble” or “gather together.” Alternate translation: “among the people who assemble together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	2	13	dx1q	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	-1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce them as quotations but instead as words that Jesus the Son has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that these are quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Isaiah 8:17](../../isa/08/17.md), and the second quotation comes from [Isaiah 8:18](../../isa/08/18.md). Since the author introduces these quotation as words that the Son has spoken, you should introduce the quotations as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotations. Alternate translation: “And again he says … And again he says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	2	13	dx1q	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	-1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce them as quotations but instead as words that Jesus the Son has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that these are quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Isaiah 8:17](../../isa/08/17.md), and the second quotation comes from [Isaiah 8:18](../../isa/08/18.md). Since the author introduces these quotation as words that the Son has spoken, you should introduce the quotations as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotations. Alternate translation: “And again he says … And again he says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	2	13	efbv	figs-quotations	καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι πεποιθὼς ἐπ’ αὐτῷ. καὶ πάλιν, ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ καὶ τὰ παιδία, ἅ μοι ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεός	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “And again he says that he will trust him. And again he says that people should behold him and the little children whom God gave him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	2	13	s1fp	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1	And again,	Here, the word **him** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	2	13	y4vb	figs-exclamations	ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ	1		Here, the word **Behold** draws attention to **I and the little children**. It asks the audience to pay special attention to what follows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that draws attention to what follows. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ HEB	2	18	gqfo	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** int
 HEB	2	18	jnzj	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς	1		Here, the word **himself** emphasizes Jesus in order to set up the comparison with everyone else who is **tempted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes **he**, that is, Jesus. Alternate translation: “is one who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
 HEB	2	18	xde4	figs-activepassive	πειρασθείς…πειραζομένοις	1	was tempted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things “tempt” people. Alternate translation: “things having tempted him … whom things tempt” or “having experienced temptation … who experience temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	2	18	a3a6		πέπονθεν αὐτὸς, πειρασθείς	1	who are tempted	Here, the phrase **having been tempted** could identify: (1) the situation in which Jesus **suffered**. Alternate translation: “he himself had suffered when he was tempted” (2) what resulted from the “suffering.” Alternate translation: “he was tempted when he suffered”
-HEB	3	intro	mu26			0		# Hebrews 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)<br>      * Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:1–6)<br>      * Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [3:7b–11](../03/07.md), [15](../03/15.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Today”<br><br>The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” The author mentions “today” again in [3:13](../03/13.md), [15](../03/15.md). In both of these verses, he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” So, anything that happens during the time we call “today” must happen every day, since every day is “today.” In this way, the author shows that the quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) applies to his audience every day. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])<br><br>### Rest<br><br>The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “rest.” In the context of the Psalm, this “rest” probably refers to the land that God promised to give to the Israelites. However, scholars debate what the author of Hebrews means when he uses the word “rest.” This is important because the author speaks much more about “rest” in chapter 4. There are two major options for what “rest” could mean: (1) “rest” could refer to how people rest, that is, to the state or experience of “resting.” (2) “rest” could refer to the place where people rest. For the author of Hebrews, this place of “rest” is either in heaven or on a renewed earth. Before you choose how to translate “rest,” consider reading [Hebrews 4:1–11](../../heb/04/01.md) so that you can decide what the author means when he uses “rest.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “house” in [3:1–6](../03/01.md)<br><br>In [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the author refers to a “house.” In the author’s culture, “house” could refer to a building that people live in, or it could refer to a “household” or a group of related people. In these verses, the author uses both meanings of “house.” In [3:2](../03/02.md), [5–6](../03/05.md), “house” refers to a group of related people, God’s people. In [3:3–4](../03/03.md), “house” refers to a building that people live in. In these verses, the author uses a “house” (the building) as an example to explain more about the “house” (the people). If you do not have a word that could mean both “building” and “people,” you may need to express “house” with two different words. If so, you will need to make sure that your readers know that the author is comparing a building to people, especially in [3:3–4](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>The author asks several questions in this chapter (see [3:16–18](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about the quotation from Psalm 95. In [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the second question in each verse answers the first question. In [3:18](../03/18.md), the second half of the question answers the first half of the question. For ways to translate these questions, see the notes on [3:16–18](../03/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The quotation from Psalm 95<br><br>David wrote [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) many years after the events that the psalm refers to. You can read the story about these events in [Num 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md) (see also the related story in [Exodus 17:1–7](../../exo/17/01.md)). In these stories, the Israelites complain and disobey God, and God punishes them. David refers back to these stories to encourage the Israelites, whom he ruled, to act differently. He wanted them to listen to and obey God. The author of Hebrews quotes what David wrote for a similar reason. He wants to encourage his audience to listen to and obey God, and he shows that what David wrote still applies to his audience. Consider reading the Old Testament stories and Psalm 95 before translating this chapter. See the notes for places where the author refers directly to Psalm 95 or to the Old Testament stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])<br><br>### What does “for 40 years” modify?<br><br>In [3:10](../03/10.md), “for 40 years” tells how long the Israelites saw God’s works. However, in [3:17](../03/17.md), it refers to the time during which God “was upset” with the Israelites. This is not a contradiction, because the author knew that the Israelites saw God’s works and that God was upset with them during the same period of “40 years.” There is no need to harmonize these two verses.
+HEB	3	intro	mu26			0		# Hebrews 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)<br>      * Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:1–6)<br>      * Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [3:7b–11](../03/07.md), [15](../03/15.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Today”<br><br>The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” The author mentions “today” again in [3:13](../03/13.md), [15](../03/15.md). In both of these verses, he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” So, anything that happens during the time we call “today” must happen every day, since every day is “today.” In this way, the author shows that the quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) applies to his audience every day. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])<br><br>### Rest<br><br>The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “rest.” In the context of the Psalm, this “rest” probably refers to the land that God promised to give to the Israelites. However, scholars debate what the author of Hebrews means when he uses the word “rest.” This is important because the author speaks much more about “rest” in chapter 4. There are two major options for what “rest” could mean: (1) “rest” could refer to how people rest, that is, to the state or experience of “resting.” (2) “rest” could refer to the place where people rest. For the author of Hebrews, this place of “rest” is either in heaven or on a renewed earth. Before you choose how to translate “rest,” consider reading [Hebrews 4:1–11](../../heb/04/01.md) so that you can decide what the author means when he uses “rest.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “house” in [3:1–6](../03/01.md)<br><br>In [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the author refers to a “house.” In the author’s culture, “house” could refer to a building that people live in, or it could refer to a “household” or a group of related people. In these verses, the author uses both meanings of “house.” In [3:2](../03/02.md), [5–6](../03/05.md), “house” refers to a group of related people, God’s people. In [3:3–4](../03/03.md), “house” refers to a building that people live in. In these verses, the author uses a “house” (the building) as an example to explain more about the “house” (the people). If you do not have a word that could mean both “building” and “people,” you may need to express “house” with two different words. If so, you will need to make sure that your readers know that the author is comparing a building to people, especially in [3:3–4](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>The author asks several questions in this chapter (see [3:16–18](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about the quotation from Psalm 95. In [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the second question in each verse answers the first question. In [3:18](../03/18.md), the second half of the question answers the first half of the question. For ways to translate these questions, see the notes on [3:16–18](../03/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The quotation from Psalm 95<br><br>David wrote [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) many years after the events that the psalm refers to. You can read the story about these events in [Num 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md) (see also the related story in [Exodus 17:1–7](../../exo/17/01.md)). In these stories, the Israelites complain and disobey God, and God punishes them. David refers back to these stories to encourage the Israelites, whom he ruled, to act differently. He wanted them to listen to and obey God. The author of Hebrews quotes what David wrote for a similar reason. He wants to encourage his audience to listen to and obey God, and he shows that what David wrote still applies to his audience. Consider reading the Old Testament stories and Psalm 95 before translating this chapter. See the notes for places where the author refers directly to Psalm 95 or to the Old Testament stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])<br><br>### What does “for 40 years” modify?<br><br>In [3:10](../03/10.md), “for 40 years” tells how long the Israelites saw God’s works. However, in [3:17](../03/17.md), it refers to the time during which God “was very angry” with the Israelites. This is not a contradiction, because the author knew that the Israelites saw God’s works and that God was very angry with them during the same period of “40 years.” There is no need to harmonize these two verses.
 HEB	3	1	m1cv	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅθεν	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what the author has said about Jesus in [2:5–18](../02/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly introduces an inference. Alternate translation: “As a result of all that” or “Because of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	3	1	tp7e	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	holy brothers	Although the word **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
 HEB	3	1	af15	figs-possession	κλήσεως ἐπουρανίου, μέτοχοι	1	you share in a heavenly calling	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that believers “share” a **heavenly calling**. Believers could “share” this **calling** with: (1) other believers. Alternate translation: “who share together in a heavenly calling” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “share with Jesus a heavenly calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ HEB	3	6	v817	translate-unknown	κατάσχωμεν	1		Here, the phrase **hold f
 HEB	3	6	kp9y	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν	1	if we hold fast to our courage and the hope of which we boast	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confidence**, **boasting**, and **hope**, you could express those ideas by using verbs and adjectives or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “we keep being confident and proud about what we hope for” or “we continue to boldly await and speak joyfully about the things that we expect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	3	6	br2z	figs-possession	τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **confidence** and **boasting** about or concerning **{our} hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural construction. Alternate translation: “the confidence and the boasting concerning our hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	3	7	qry7	grammar-connect-logic-result	διό	1		Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on the claim from the previous verse that we are his “house” as long as “we hold fast” (see [3:6](../03/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation that is based on a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	3	7	c4sl	writing-quotations	καθὼς λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	General Information:	Here and in the next four verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 95:7b–11](../../psa/95/07.md), which refers to a story that can be found in [Numbers 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md). See the chapter introduction for more information about this story. Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the **Holy Spirit says**, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as says the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	3	7	c4sl	writing-quotations	καθὼς λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	General Information:	Here and in the next four verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament. The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 95:7b–11](../../psa/95/07.md), which refers to a story that can be found in [Numbers 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md). See the chapter introduction for more information about this story. Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the **Holy Spirit says**, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as says the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	3	7	vcio	figs-quotations	καθὼς λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next four verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “you should do just what the Holy Spirit says: that today, if you hear his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	3	7	ntzk	translate-unknown	σήμερον	1		Here, the word **Today** refers to the period of time between when the sun rises and when it rises again. Even more specifically, it identifies that this period of time is the current one. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers clearly to that current time period. Alternate translation: “Right now” or “At this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	3	7	u66q	grammar-connect-condition-fact	ἐὰν	1	if you hear his voice	Here the author is speaking as if “hearing his voice” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
@@ -312,19 +312,19 @@ HEB	3	9	td5w	figs-doublet	ἐπείρασαν…ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ	1		Her
 HEB	3	9	q7c2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ	1	by testing me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **examination**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “examine.” Alternate translation: “by examining me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	3	9	k3kf	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ ἔργα μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “perform” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what I performed” or “what I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	3	9	fg7n	figs-explicit	καὶ εἶδον τὰ ἔργα μου	1		Here, the clause **they saw my works** could refer to: (1) how the **fathers tested** God even though they **saw** the amazing **works** that God did to rescue them and bring them through the wilderness. Alternate translation: “even though they saw my powerful deeds” (2) how God acted to punish the **fathers** for how they **tested** him. Alternate translation: “and they saw how I punished them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	3	10	cgs9	figs-quotations	τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη. διὸ προσώχθισα τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, καὶ εἶπον, ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the surrounding verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “for 40 years. Therefore, he was upset with that generation, and he said, ‘They are always going astray in their hearts, and they have not known my ways.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	3	10	cgs9	figs-quotations	τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη. διὸ προσώχθισα τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, καὶ εἶπον, ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the surrounding verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “for 40 years. Therefore, he was very angry with that generation, and he said, ‘They are always going astray in their hearts, and they have not known my ways.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	3	10	qap2	figs-infostructure	τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη	1		Here, the phrase **for 40 years** goes with the end of the previous verse and tells how long “they saw my works”([3:9](../03/09.md)). You could include these words at the end of verse 9, or you could include them here in verse 10 and show with punctuation that they belong with the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	3	10	upb8	translate-unknown	προσώχθισα	1	I was displeased	Here, the phrase **I was upset** indicates that God was properly angry or displeased with the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to proper or appropriate anger and displeasure. Alternate translation: “I was displeased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-HEB	3	10	ohlh	figs-123person	διὸ προσώχθισα…εἶπον	1		Just as in [3:9](../03/09.md), God speaks directly using first person pronouns. However, in [3:7–8](../03/07.md), the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. Use the same translation strategy that you used in [3:9](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, as God says, I was upset … I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+HEB	3	10	upb8	translate-unknown	προσώχθισα	1	I was displeased	Here, the phrase **I was very angry** indicates that God was properly angry or displeased with the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to proper or appropriate anger and displeasure. Alternate translation: “I was displeased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	3	10	ohlh	figs-123person	διὸ προσώχθισα…εἶπον	1		Just as in [3:9](../03/09.md), God speaks directly using first person pronouns. However, in [3:7–8](../03/07.md), the author of the quotation refers to God in the third person. Use the same translation strategy that you used in [3:9](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, as God says, I was very angry … I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 HEB	3	10	bfu5	figs-quotesinquotes	εἶπον, ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου;	1		If a direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that they are always going astray in their hearts, and they have not known my ways.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 HEB	3	10	lz7n	figs-parallelism	ἀεὶ πλανῶνται τῇ καρδίᾳ; αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδούς μου	1		Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “They are always going astray from my ways in their hearts” or “Their hearts have never know my ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 HEB	3	10	kh4v	figs-metaphor	ἀεὶ πλανῶνται	1	They have always gone astray in their hearts	Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the Israelites were traveling down the wrong road. He speaks in this way to indicate that they were not following God properly. Someone who is **going astray** does not want to do what is right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “They are not following me” or “They are happy to disobey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	3	10	rmqh	figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ	1		In the author’s culture, the word **hearts** refers to the places where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer part of the human body where your culture believes that humans think and plan, or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in their minds” or “in what they plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	3	10	l5t7	figs-metaphor	τὰς ὁδούς μου	1	They have not known my ways	Here, God speaks as if he has **ways** or paths on which he walks. When the audience does not know these **ways**, that means that they do not know what God wants or values. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “how I want them to conduct their lives” or “what I value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	3	11	mu48	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὡς	1		Here, the word **As** could introduce: (1) a result from what the ancestors did. Alternate translation: “So” or “Therefore,” (2) a reason why the people will not **enter into my rest**. If you choose this option, you may need to include some implied information about how the ancestors did not **enter** the **rest**. Alternate translation: “They did not enter the land that I had promised, just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	3	11	ipk1	figs-quotations	ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in previous verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “for 40 years. Therefore, he was upset with that generation, and he said, ‘They are always going astray in their hearts, and they have not known my ways.’” “As he swore in his wrath, ‘If they will enter into my rest … !’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+HEB	3	11	ipk1	figs-quotations	ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου.	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this verse as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in previous verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “for 40 years. Therefore, he was very angry with that generation, and he said, ‘They are always going astray in their hearts, and they have not known my ways.’” “As he swore in his wrath, ‘If they will enter into my rest …!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	3	11	yyhz	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wrath**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “wrathful” or “angry.” Alternate translation: “as I was wrathful” or “angrily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	3	11	kl9e	figs-quotesinquotes	ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου.	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I swore in my wrath that they would never enter into my rest … !” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+HEB	3	11	kl9e	figs-quotesinquotes	ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου.	1		If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I swore in my wrath that they would never enter into my rest …!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 HEB	3	11	h967	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου	1		Here God uses the word **If** to introduce a statement that he knows will not be true. What the form means is that **they** will definitely not **enter into my rest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “They will never enter into my rest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 HEB	3	11	tz3l	figs-explicit	εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου	1	They will never enter my rest	Here, the word **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “they will participate in the way that I rest” or “they will rest with me” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “they will enter into my resting place” or “they will enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	3	11	tsov	figs-abstractnouns	κατάπαυσίν μου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the way that I rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -360,8 +360,8 @@ HEB	3	16	ldi4		ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν	1		The author uses
 HEB	3	16	yfdd	figs-go	οἱ ἐξελθόντες	1		Here, the phrase **came out** refers to leaving a country or area. Use a word for this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “those who went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
 HEB	3	16	j14d	translate-names	ἐξ Αἰγύπτου	1		The word **Egypt** is the name of a country in northern Africa. The Israelites were slaves in this country until they **came out from** it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	3	16	djja	translate-names	διὰ Μωϋσέως	1		The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-HEB	3	17	swy4	figs-rquestion	τίσιν…προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη? οὐχὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτήσασιν, ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ?	1	With whom was he angry for forty years? Was it not with those who sinned, whose dead bodies fell in the wilderness?	The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **with whom he was upset** with **those who sinned**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are with whom he was upset for 40 years. It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” or “with whom was he upset for 40 years? It was with those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-HEB	3	17	goid		προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη	1		The author uses the phrases **was he upset** and **for 40 years** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “I was upset” and “for 40 years” in [3:10](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “was he displeased for those 40 years”
+HEB	3	17	swy4	figs-rquestion	τίσιν…προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη? οὐχὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτήσασιν, ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ?	1	With whom was he angry for forty years? Was it not with those who sinned, whose dead bodies fell in the wilderness?	The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **with whom he was very angry** with **those who sinned**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are with whom he was very angry for 40 years. It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” or “with whom was he very angry for 40 years? It was with those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+HEB	3	17	goid		προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη	1		The author uses the phrases **was he very angry** and **for 40 years** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “I was very angry” and “for 40 years” in [3:10](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “was he displeased for those 40 years”
 HEB	3	17	uhga	figs-idiom	ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ	1		The author uses these words because he found them in [Numbers 14:29](../../num/14/29.md), where God tells Moses what is going to happen to **those who sinned**. The phrase **corpses fell** refers to people dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to people dying. Alternate translation: “who fell down dead in the wilderness” or “who were buried in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	3	18	l1gc	figs-rquestion	τίσιν…ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἀπειθήσασιν?	1	To whom did he swear that they would not enter his rest, if it was not to those who disobeyed him?	The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second half of the question gives the answer to the first half: “it was those who disobeyed.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **who disobeyed** with “those to whom he swore.” Alternate translation: “you know who they are to whom he swore that they would not enter into his rest. It was to those who disobeyed.” or “to whom did he swear that they would not enter into his rest? It was to those who disobeyed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	3	18	q16u		ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ	1	they would not enter his rest	The author uses the clause **they would not enter into his rest** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “If they will enter into my rest” in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “did he swear, ‘they will never enter into my rest,’”
@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ HEB	4	3	ypr4	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου	1		If
 HEB	4	3	vym3	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου	1	from the foundation of the world	The author speaks of how God created the **world** as if he set the **world** on a **foundation** or solid base. In the author’s culture, this was a common way to refer to how God created everything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to how God created everything. Alternate translation: “from the beginning of the world” or “from the time when the world was created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	4	4	q2n3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the proof for what the author has claimed about how God’s “works were finished from the foundation of the world” (see [4:3](../04/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof or support. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	4	4	fzgj	writing-pronouns	εἴρηκεν…που	1		Here, just as in [4:3](../04/03.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit has somewhere spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God has somewhere spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	4	4	hsuj	writing-quotations	εἴρηκεν…που περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης οὕτως	1		Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that someone (probably the Holy Spirit) has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md). This passage tells the story of how God created everything in six days and then rested on the seventh day. Since the author introduces the quotation as words that someone has spoken, you should do the same. The word **somewhere** shows that the words come from Scripture without stating exactly where. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “in another place he has said thus about the seventh day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	4	4	hsuj	writing-quotations	εἴρηκεν…που περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης οὕτως	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament. He does not introduce it as a quotation but instead as words that someone (probably the Holy Spirit) has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md). This passage tells the story of how God created everything in six days and then rested on the seventh day. Since the author introduces the quotation as words that someone has spoken, you should do the same. The word **somewhere** shows that the words come from Scriptures without stating exactly where. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “in another place he has said thus about the seventh day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	4	4	a7ij	figs-quotations	περὶ τῆς ἑβδόμης…καὶ κατέπαυσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ;	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “about the seventh day that God rested on that day from all his works.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	4	4	hbm5	translate-ordinal	τῆς ἑβδόμης…τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ἑβδόμῃ	1	the seventh day	If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “day seven … day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 HEB	4	4	jojq	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν ἔργων αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “from the things that he was doing” or “from what he was working” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -520,11 +520,11 @@ HEB	5	4	p6hc	figs-activepassive	ἀλλὰ καλούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ
 HEB	5	4	uz3k	figs-ellipsis	καθώσπερ καὶ Ἀαρών	1		This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “just as also Aaron was called by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	5	4	m937	translate-names	Ἀαρών	1		The word **Aaron** is the name of a man. He was the first person whom God chose to a be a high priest for his people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	5	5	gu9w		οὐχ ἑαυτὸν ἐδόξασεν γενηθῆναι ἀρχιερέα	1		Alternate translation: “did not make himself great by choosing to be a high priest”
-HEB	5	5	y2wk	writing-quotations	ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to **Christ**. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to **Christ**, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “the one who said these words to him declared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	5	5	y2wk	writing-quotations	ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to **Christ**. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to **Christ**, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “the one who said these words to him declared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	5	5	c45n	figs-quotations	ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν, Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “the one having spoken to him said that he was his son; today he had fathered him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	5	5	pr3f	figs-ellipsis	ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν	1	the one speaking to him said	This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “the one who spoke to him glorified him to become a high priest, saying” or “he was glorified to become a high priest by the one who spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	5	5	i694		Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε	1	You are my Son; today I have become your Father	Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [1:5](../01/05.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
-HEB	5	6	bce6	writing-quotations	καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει	1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to Christ. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../../psa/110/04.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to Christ, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. The phrase **in another {place}** shows that the words come from a different part of the Old Testament, here a different psalm. Alternate translation: “he also declared, as it is recorded in another place in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	5	6	bce6	writing-quotations	καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει	1	General Information:	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to Christ. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../../psa/110/04.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to Christ, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. The phrase **in another {place}** shows that the words come from a different part of the Old Testament, here a different psalm. Alternate translation: “he also declared, as it is recorded in another place in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	5	6	ds6v	writing-pronouns	καὶ…λέγει	1	he also says	Here, the word **he** refers to God the Father, who speaks these words to his Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	5	6	k5uw	figs-quotations	ἐν ἑτέρῳ…σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	in another place	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “in another place that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	5	6	pb9k	figs-yousingular	σὺ	1		Because the quotation is referring to one person (Christ), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -703,19 +703,19 @@ HEB	6	20	onb9	translate-unknown	πρόδρομος	1		Here, the word **forerunne
 HEB	6	20	a16c	figs-infostructure	πρόδρομος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν εἰσῆλθεν	1		Here, the phrase **on our behalf** could modify: (1) **entered**. In this case, Jesus has **entered** for our sake, or to help us. Alternate translation: “has entered for our sake as a forerunner” (2) **forerunner**. In this case, Jesus opened the way **on our behalf**. Alternate translation: “has entered as a forerunner who leads us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	6	20	q9tt	grammar-connect-time-sequential	γενόμενος	1		Here, the phrase **having become** introduces action that could happen: (1) before Jesus **entered**. In this case, God makes him a **high priest**, and then he enters the heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “already having become” (2) at the same time as Jesus **entered**. In this case, the “entering” and the “becoming” describe the same thing or happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “when he became” or “at the same time as he became” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 HEB	6	20	zgj6		κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	after the order of Melchizedek	Here the author uses the same words he used in [5:6](../05/06.md), [10](../05/10.md). You should translate this phrase in exactly the same way as you did in those verses.
-HEB	7	intro	y8j3			0		# Hebrews 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:1–10)<br>      * Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:11–28)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [7:17](../07/17.md), [21](../07/21.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### High priests<br><br>In this chapter, the author frequently discusses high priests. He speaks about their “order,” which refers to the requirements, system, and service that go along with being a priest in that “order.” He focuses on two “orders.” First is the order of Aaron, made up of priests who are descended from Levi. These priests are required by Moses’ law and must offer sacrifices for themselves as well as for the rest of the people since they also sin. Also, each priest eventually dies and must be replaced by another. Second is the order of Melchizedek, made up of priests who have an “indestructible life.” This order only includes Melchizedek and Jesus. Jesus only offers sacrifices for the sins of other people, since he does not sin. Also, he never dies, so he can be a priest forever. Consider how to refer to these two different kinds of priests in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])<br><br>### Melchizedek<br><br>In this chapter, the author refers to Melchizedek as he is described in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md), including how the story does not mention his father, mother, birth, or death. Scholars debate whether the author thought that Melchizedek was a supernatural being, such as an angel, or whether the author simply describes the character Melchizedek without referring to the historical person named Melchizedek. What is clear is that the author thinks that Melchizedek was “made like” Jesus, not the other way around (see [7:3](../07/03.md)). In other words, the author speaks about Melchizedek because the description of him in Genesis is a helpful way to think about Jesus. Since Melchizedek was greater than Abraham, Jesus, whom Melchizedek is like, is greater than Abraham’s descendants who became priests. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])<br><br>### Tithes<br><br>In [7:1–10](../07/01.md), the author refers multiple times to giving and collecting “tithes” or “a tenth.” These words refer to the practice of separating out one tenth of what a person earned or grew and giving it to someone else. In the law that God gave through Moses, the Israelites were required to give a “tenth” or “tithe” to priests. This enabled the priests to perform their service without having to do other work. The author uses the “tithes” language to show that Abraham, Levi’s great-grandfather, paid a “tithe” to Melchizedek. That means that the descendants of Abraham who received “tithes” actually paid “tithes” through Abraham to Melchizedek. In the author’s argument, this shows that Melchizedek and his priesthood are greater than Levi and his priesthood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tenth]])<br><br>### “Swearing” and the “oath”<br><br>Just as in chapter 6, the author refers multiple times to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. The author implies that words spoken with an “oath” have more significance or indicate something greater than words without an “oath.” If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The “loin” of Abraham<br><br>In [7:5](../07/05.md), [10](../07/10.md), the author refers to the “loin” of Abraham. This word is a polite way to refer to the male sexual organ. In [7:5](../07/05.md), the author’s point is that all the Israelites are descended from Abraham, since they all come from his “loin.” In [7:10](../07/10.md), the author’s point is that Levi, the great-grandson of Abraham, could be considered to be inside Abraham’s “loin” before Abraham and Sarah had their son, Isaac. In the author’s culture, one could speak of the descendants of a man as if they were inside the man’s sexual organ. Consider natural ways to express these ideas in your language, and see the notes on these two verses.
+HEB	7	intro	y8j3			0		# Hebrews 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)<br>      * Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:1–10)<br>      * Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:11–28)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [7:17](../07/17.md), [21](../07/21.md), which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### High priests<br><br>In this chapter, the author frequently discusses high priests. He speaks about their “order,” which refers to the requirements, system, and service that go along with being a priest in that “order.” He focuses on two “orders.” First is the order of Aaron, made up of priests who are descended from Levi. These priests are required by Moses’ law and must offer sacrifices for themselves as well as for the rest of the people since they also sin. Also, each priest eventually dies and must be replaced by another. Second is the order of Melchizedek, made up of priests who have an “indestructible life.” This order only includes Melchizedek and Jesus. Jesus only offers sacrifices for the sins of other people, since he does not sin. Also, he never dies, so he can be a priest forever. Consider how to refer to these two different kinds of priests in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])<br><br>### Melchizedek<br><br>In this chapter, the author refers to Melchizedek as he is described in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md), including how the story does not mention his father, mother, birth, or death. Scholars debate whether the author thought that Melchizedek was a supernatural being such as an angel, or whether the author simply describes the character Melchizedek without referring to the historical person named Melchizedek. What is clear is that the author thinks that Melchizedek was “made like” Jesus, not the other way around (see [7:3](../07/03.md)). In other words, the author speaks about Melchizedek because the description of him in Genesis is a helpful way to think about Jesus. Since Melchizedek was greater than Abraham, Jesus, whom Melchizedek is like, is greater than Abraham’s descendants who became priests. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])<br><br>### Tithes<br><br>In [7:1–10](../07/01.md), the author refers multiple times to giving and collecting “tithes” or “a tenth.” These words refer to the practice of separating out one tenth of what a person earned or grew and giving it to someone else. In the law that God gave through Moses, the Israelites were required to give a “tenth” or “tithe” to priests. This enabled the priests to perform their service without having to do other work. The author uses the “tithes” language to show that Abraham, Levi’s great-grandfather, paid a “tithe” to Melchizedek. That means that the descendants of Abraham who received “tithes” actually paid “tithes” through Abraham to Melchizedek. In the author’s argument, this shows that Melchizedek and his priesthood are greater than Levi and his priesthood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tenth]])<br><br>### “Swearing” and the “oath”<br><br>Just as in chapter 6, the author refers multiple times to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. The author implies that words spoken with an “oath” have more significance or indicate something greater than words without an “oath.” If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The “loin” of Abraham<br><br>In [7:5](../07/05.md), [10](../07/10.md), the author refers to the “loin” of Abraham. This word is a polite way to refer to the male sexual organ. In [7:5](../07/05.md), the author’s point is that all the Israelites are descended from Abraham, since they all come from his “loin.” In [7:10](../07/10.md), the author’s point is that Levi, the great-grandson of Abraham, could be considered to be inside Abraham’s “loin” before Abraham and Sarah had their son, Isaac. In the author’s culture, one could speak of the descendants of a man as if they were inside the man’s sexual organ. Consider natural ways to express these ideas in your language, and see the notes on these two verses.
 HEB	7	1	mwy8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the word **For** signals that the author will now go on to explain who “Melchizedek” is and why he is important. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	1	smhy	figs-idiom	οὗτος…ὁ Μελχισέδεκ	1		Here, the phrase **this Melchizedek** identifies this **Melchizedek** as the same one whom the author was speaking about in the previous verse (see [6:20](../06/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly identifies that this is the same **Melchizedek**. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek, the one whom I just mentioned,” or “this man Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	1	rfc9	translate-names	Σαλήμ	1	Salem	The word **Salem** is the name of a city that existed somewhere in the middle of what is now Israel. Some scholars think that it is another name for the city of Shechem, while other scholars think it is another name for the city of Jerusalem. Since our author is referring directly to [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md), you should preserve this name as much as possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-HEB	7	1	h4n1	translate-names	τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου	1		The phrase **Most High God** refers to God and describes as the most powerful and greatest being. The author uses this phrase since it appears in [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a title that describes God as powerful and great. Alternate translation: “of God, who is more powerful than anything else” or “of the Most Exalted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+HEB	7	1	h4n1	translate-names	τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου	1		The phrase **Most High God** refers to God and describes him as the most powerful and greatest being. The author uses this phrase since it appears in [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a title that describes God as powerful and great. Alternate translation: “of God, who is more powerful than anything else” or “of the Most Exalted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	1	ucr1	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ	1		The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	1	ji3f	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ὑποστρέφοντι	1		Here, the word **returning** refers to action that happened at the same time as when Melchizedek **met Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he was returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 HEB	7	1	rx36	figs-explicit	Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων	1	Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings	The phrase **the slaughter of the kings** refers to a story in [Genesis 14:1–16](../gen/14/01.md). Four **kings** conquered a city in which Abraham’s nephew was living, and they captured his nephew. Abraham took the fighting men that he had, and he conquered and “slaughtered” the armies of these four **kings**. He recovered all the valuable things that these **kings** had taken, including his nephew. When he was going back home after defeating the **kings**, he met **Melchizedek**. If your readers would need to know more about this background than the author states explicitly, you could include some extra information in your translation, or you could use a footnote to explain the story. Alternate translation: “Abraham, who was returning from the battle in which he defeated the four kings who had kidnapped his nephew,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	1	np7o	figs-synecdoche	τῶν βασιλέων	1		Here, the word **kings** refers to both the **kings** and their armies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer explicitly to their armies. Alternate translation: “of the kings and their fighting men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 HEB	7	2	q87x	writing-pronouns	ᾧ	1	It was to him	Here, the word **whom** refers back to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “to whom—that is, Melchizedek—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	2	dplz	translate-unknown	δεκάτην…ἐμέρισεν	1		Here, the word **apportioned** refers to how a person might divide a group of things into “portions” and share give each portion to a person. Here, Abraham divides up what he has into ten portions, and he gives Melchizedek one of those portions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “handed over one tenth” or “presented one part out of ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	7	2	dplz	translate-unknown	δεκάτην…ἐμέρισεν	1		Here, the word **apportioned** refers to how a person might divide a group of things into “portions” and give each portion to a person. Here, Abraham divides up what he has into ten portions, and he gives Melchizedek one of those portions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “gifted one tenth” or “presented one part out of ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	2	pw9x	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ πάντων	1		Here, the phrase **all {things}** refers to the things that Abraham took from the kings that he had defeated. This would have included what the kings took from their enemies and things that they themselves had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **all {things} refers to. Alternate translation: “from all that he had plundered from the kings” or “from everything that he took after defeating the kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	2	x3bd	figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος	1		Here the author does not state what is **translated**. The word **first** implies that it is the first name for this person: “Melchizedek.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is translaing the name “Melchizedek.” Alternate translation: “his name first being translated as” or “first indeed the name ‘Melchizedek’ being translated as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	7	2	x3bd	figs-explicit	πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος	1		Here the author does not state what is **translated**. The word **first** implies that it is the first name for this person: “Melchizedek.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is translating the name “Melchizedek.” Alternate translation: “his name first being translated as” or “first indeed the name ‘Melchizedek’ being translated as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	2	trz1	translate-names	πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν, βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης	1		Here the author provides translations of Melchizedek’s name (“Melchizedek”) and his title (**king of Salem**) from Hebrew, the language that Abraham spoke. The name “Melchizedek” means **king of righteousness**, and the name **Salem** sounds like the Hebrew word for **peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that gives the meaning of names. Alternate translation: “first indeed his name means ‘king of righteousness,’ and then also ‘Salem’ means ‘peace,’ so ‘king of Salem’ means ‘king of peace,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	2	kfsz	figs-activepassive	πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author wishes to emphasize what the words mean in a different language rather than focusing on the person doing the translating. Alternate translation: “first whose name we translate as” or “first indeed meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	2	abh4	figs-possession	βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης…βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης	1	king of righteousness … king of peace	Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about a **king** who is characterized by **righteousness** and **peace**. This means that he rules in a “righteous” and “peaceful” way and that what he does leads to **righteousness** and **peace** in his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “king who rules righteously … king who rules peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -737,13 +737,13 @@ HEB	7	5	l29w	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ οἱ μὲν	1		Here, the wo
 HEB	7	5	j5c3		ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ	1		Here, the phrase **from the sons of Levi** could refer to: (1) how only some of the **sons of Levi** became priests. Alternate translation: “out of the sons of Levi” (2) how every one of the **sons of Levi** is a priest. Alternate translation: “who are sons of Levi and”
 HEB	7	5	ffl4	translate-kinship	τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ	1		In the author’s culture, the word **sons** could refer to all the descendants of an important person. Here, **sons of Levi** identifies everyone who is descended from **Levi**, one of the grandsons of Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants. Only men could **receive the priesthood**, so you could use a masculine form here. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Levi” or “Levi’s tribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	7	5	xbci	translate-names	Λευεὶ	1		The word **Levi** is the name of a man. He was one of the twelve sons of Jacob, the son of Abraham. All Israelites are descended from these twelve sons. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-HEB	7	5	l9zq	figs-distinguish	Λευεὶ τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες	1	The sons of Levi who receive the priesthood	Here, the phrase **who receive the priesthood** identifies the specific **sons of Levi** that the author is speaking about. Use a form in your language identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “of Levi, specifically those who receive the priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
+HEB	7	5	l9zq	figs-distinguish	Λευεὶ τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες	1	The sons of Levi who receive the priesthood	Here, the phrase **who receive the priesthood** identifies the specific **sons of Levi** that the author is speaking about. Use a form which in your language identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “of Levi, specifically those who receive the priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
 HEB	7	5	pjj8	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are called to be priests” or “who act as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	5	wash	figs-explicit	ἐντολὴν ἔχουσιν…κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1		Here the author refers specifically to the law that God gave through Moses. He probably is thinking about the **command** about Levites and tithes in [Numbers 18:21–24](../num/18/21.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to a specific part of Moses’ law. Alternate translation: “are commanded in Moses’ law” or “are told by God in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	5	hn3k	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποδεκατοῦν	1	from the people	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **tithe**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “to receive one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	5	ri2y	translate-kinship	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν	1	from their brothers	Here, the word **brothers** refers to anyone who is descended from **Abraham** and Jacob, which would be all Israelites. It does not refer just to children of one’s parents. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to everyone from one tribe or nation. Alternate translation: “from their fellow Israelites” or “from the others in their nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
+HEB	7	5	ri2y	translate-kinship	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν	1	from their brothers	Here, the word **brothers** refers to anyone who is descended from **Abraham** and Jacob, which would be all Israelites. It does not refer just to male children of one’s parents. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to everyone from one tribe or nation. Alternate translation: “from their fellow Israelites” or “from the others in their nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	7	5	busq	figs-gendernotations	τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν	1		Although the word **brothers** is masculine, it refers to any relative, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from their relatives” or “from their brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-HEB	7	5	rx2f	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καίπερ	1		Here, the phrase **even though** introduces something that is unexpected given what the author has already said. In other words, it is surprising that the **sons of Levi** receive tithes from **their brothers** when they have all **come from the loin of Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrary to what is expected. Alternate translation: “although” or “despite how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+HEB	7	5	rx2f	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	καίπερ	1		Here, the phrase **even though** introduces something that is unexpected, given what the author has already said. In other words, it is surprising that the **sons of Levi** receive tithes from **their brothers** when they have all **come from the loin of Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrary to what is expected. Alternate translation: “although” or “despite how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
 HEB	7	5	x4za	figs-idiom	ἐξεληλυθότας ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος Ἀβραάμ	1	they, too, have come from Abraham’s body	The phrase **from the loin of Abraham** identifies everyone who has **come** from that **loin** as descendants of **Abraham**. The word **loin** refers to the male sexual organ, so anyone who has come from someone’s **loin** is descended from that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that identifies people who have descended from one ancestor. Alternate translation: “they have Abraham as a common ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	5	m23m	translate-names	Ἀβραάμ	1		The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	6	bg0k	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the word **But** introduces the second half of the contrast. The first half is in the previous verse ([7:5](../07/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces the second half of a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “And on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -759,36 +759,36 @@ HEB	7	7	wdtx	figs-idiom	χωρὶς…πάσης ἀντιλογίας	1		The ph
 HEB	7	7	ddwg	figs-explicit	τὸ ἔλαττον ὑπὸ τοῦ κρείττονος εὐλογεῖται	1		The author assumes that his audience would apply this general principle to what he has said about Melchizedek blessing Abraham. If your readers would not naturally make this application, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the lesser, in this case Abraham, is blessed by the greater, in this case Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	7	k6pc	figs-activepassive	τὸ ἔλαττον ὑπὸ τοῦ κρείττονος εὐλογεῖται	1	the lesser person is blessed by the greater person	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the greater blesses the lesser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	7	hper	figs-nominaladj	τὸ ἔλαττον…τοῦ κρείττονος	1		The author is using the adjectives **lesser** and **greater** as nouns in order to refer to people who are **lesser** and **greater**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “a lesser person … a greater person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-HEB	7	8	sf79	figs-infostructure	ὧδε μὲν…ἐκεῖ δὲ	1	In this case … in that case	Here, the phrase **indeed here** introduces the first situation: that of the priests descended from Levi. The phrase **but there** introduces the second situation: that of Melchizedek the priest. The author compares how they both receive **tithes** (implicitly with Melchizedek) and contrasts how the priests descended from Levi die but Melchizedek **lives on**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that introduce two situations that the author wishes to compare and contrast. Alternate translation: “in the case of the Levites, … but in the case of Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	7	8	sf79	figs-infostructure	ὧδε μὲν…ἐκεῖ δὲ	1	In this case … in that case	The phrase **indeed here** introduces the first situation: that of the priests descended from Levi. The phrase **but there** introduces the second situation: that of Melchizedek the priest. The author compares how they both receive **tithes** (implicitly with Melchizedek) and contrasts how the priests descended from Levi die but Melchizedek **lives on**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that introduce two situations that the author wishes to compare and contrast. Alternate translation: “in the case of the Levites … but in the case of Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	7	8	negg	figs-explicit	ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἄνθρωποι	1		Here, the phrase **mortal men** refers specifically to the priests descended from Levi. The author is emphasizing that all these priests die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make clearer to whom **mortal men** refers . Alternate translation: “priests who will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	8	iymo	figs-abstractnouns	δεκάτας	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **tithes**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	8	seiq	writing-pronouns	μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ	1		Here, the word **he** refers to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make clearer to whom **he** refers. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek is testified about that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	8	seiq	writing-pronouns	μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ	1		Here, the word **he** refers to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make clear to whom **he** refers. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek is testified about that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	8	n9nb	figs-explicit	μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ	1		The author explicitly contrasts **mortal men** and **he lives on**. He does not explicitly restate the fact that Melchizedek too receives **tithes**, but he does imply it. If your readers would not make this inference, and if they would be confused about why the author does not mention **tithes** with Melchizedek, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “he is testified about that he received a tithe and that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	8	d1yr	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus Melchizedek, who **is testified**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “testifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that God did it when he spoke through Moses in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). Alternate translation: “God testifies about him” or “Moses testifies about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	7	8	d1yr	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Melchizedek, who **is testified about**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “testifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that God did it when he spoke through Moses in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). Alternate translation: “God testifies about him” or “Moses testifies about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	8	c9zz	figs-explicit	μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ	1	is testified that he lives on	Here, just as in [7:3](../07/03.md), the author is describing the character “Melchizedek” as he appears in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). The author of that story does not mention anything about Melchizedek’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to what the Old Testament tells us about Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “he is testified about that he lives on, since there is no record of his death in the Scriptures” or “the lack of any record of his death testifies that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	9	v1kt	figs-idiom	ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν	1		The phrase **so to speak** identifies what follows as something that the author considers to be imprecise or that claims more than he might wish to claim in the end. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an argument that the author does not want to commit fully to. Alternate translation: “as one might say” or “in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	7	9	v1kt	figs-idiom	ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν	1		The phrase **so to speak** identifies what follows as something that the author considers to be imprecise or that claims more than he might wish to claim in the end. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an argument to which the author does not want to fully commit. Alternate translation: “as one might say” or “in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	9	zvd3	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ…Λευεὶς	1		The word **Levi** is the name of a man. He was one of the twelve sons of Jacob, the son of **Abraham**. The word **Abraham** is also the name of a man. He was the ancestor of all the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	9	e9gc	figs-metonymy	Λευεὶς, ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων	1		Here, the name **Levi** refers to the descendants of **Levi** who were priests and collected **tithes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that **Levi** stands for the descendants of **Levi**. Alternate translation: “Levi’s descendants, the ones collecting tithes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	7	9	v1yu	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ…ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων, δεδεκάτωται	2	Levi, who received tithes, also paid tithes through Abraham	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea behind **tithe** and **tithes**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “the one collecting one out of ten portions, also had paid one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	9	odg8	figs-explicit	δι’ Ἀβραὰμ…δεδεκάτωται	1		Here the author refers to how Abraham **paid a tithe** to Melchizedek, an event the author has already mentioned (see [7:4](../07/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make more explicit that the author is referring to that event. Alternate translation: “had paid a tithe to Melchizedek through Abraham after Abraham defeated his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	10	g26s	figs-idiom	ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν	1	Levi was in the body of his ancestor	The phrase **the loin of {his} father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+HEB	7	10	g26s	figs-idiom	ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν	1	Levi was in the body of his ancestor	The phrase **the loin of {his} father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham, while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	10	bd2l	translate-kinship	τοῦ πατρὸς	1		Here the author uses the word **father** to refer in general to a male ancestor. Abraham was more specifically Levi’s great-grandfather on his father’s side. Use an appropriate word for this relationship in your culture. Alternate translation: “of his ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
 HEB	7	10	p0zd	translate-names	Μελχισέδεκ	1		The word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man, the same man that the author has been discussing in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	10	l5dd	writing-pronouns	αὐτῷ	1		Here, the word **him** refers to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	11	kdb8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν οὖν	1	Now	Here, the word **then** shows the audience that the author is continuing the argument about Melchizedek and the priests descended from Levi. The word **indeed** signals the first part of a contrast. The second part is the question in the second half of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce a development in the argument that takes the form of a contrast. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “then one the one hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	7	11	kdb8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν οὖν	1	Now	Here, the word **then** shows the audience that the author is continuing the argument about Melchizedek and the priests descended from Levi. The word **indeed** signals the first part of a contrast. The second part is the question in the second half of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce a development in the argument that takes the form of a contrast. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “then on the one hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	11	ruvi	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ μὲν οὖν τελείωσις διὰ τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης ἦν	1		Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **perfection** did not happen **through the Levitical priesthood**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by reminding the audience that God did indeed appoint **another priest** who is **according to the order of Melchizedek**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If indeed then, perfection had actually been through the Levitical priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
 HEB	7	11	yvxw	figs-abstractnouns	τελείωσις…ἦν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **perfection**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “perfect.” Alternate translation: “people could become perfect” or “what is perfect was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	11	nw53	translate-unknown	τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης	1		Here, the phrase **the Levitical priesthood** refers to the people, the system, and the practices that were connected with how the descendants of Levi served as priests to God for the rest of the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to all these components. Alternate translation: “the way that the descendants of Levi served as priests” or “the priesthood that the descendants of Levi practiced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	11	eyek	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how the Levites served as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	11	t3pe	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification or explanation of what the author just said. In other words, he speaks about **perfection** and the **Levitical priesthood** because this **priesthood** was the **basis** for the whole **law**. He wishes his audience to know that he what he says about **perfection** and **priesthood** applies to the whole **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or explanation. Alternate translation: “now” or “in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	11	etid	figs-infostructure	εἰ μὲν οὖν τελείωσις διὰ τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης ἦν, ὁ λαὸς γὰρ ἐπ’ αὐτῆς νενομοθέτηται,	1		Here the author provides a clarification after he makes his claim. If your readers would find this order confusing, you could put the clarification before the claim. Alternate translation: “Now on the basis of the Levitical priesthood the people had been given the law. If indeed then, perfection was through the Levitical priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
+HEB	7	11	t3pe	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification or explanation of what the author just said. In other words, he speaks about **perfection** and the **Levitical priesthood** because this **priesthood** was the **basis** for the whole **law**. He wishes his audience to know that what he says about **perfection** and **priesthood** applies to the whole **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or explanation. Alternate translation: “now” or “in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	7	11	etid	figs-infostructure	εἰ μὲν οὖν τελείωσις διὰ τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης ἦν, ὁ λαὸς γὰρ ἐπ’ αὐτῆς νενομοθέτηται,	1		Here the author provides a clarification after he makes his claim. If your readers would find this order confusing, you could put the clarification before the claim. Alternate translation: “Now on the basis of the Levitical priesthood, the people had been given the law. If indeed then, perfection was through the Levitical priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 HEB	7	11	ui2m	figs-explicit	ὁ λαὸς…νενομοθέτηται	1		Here the author refers to the **law** that God gave through Moses to the **people** of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to which **law** and which **people** the author is referring. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people had been given Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	11	a17s	figs-activepassive	ὁ λαὸς…νενομοθέτηται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **people**, who were **given {the} law**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God had given the law to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	7	11	a17s	figs-activepassive	ὁ λαὸς…νενομοθέτηται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **people** who were **given {the} law**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God had given the law to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	11	wgp5	figs-rquestion	τίς ἔτι χρεία κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι?	1	what further need would there have been for another priest to arise after the manner of Melchizedek, and not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron?	The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there was no further need.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “there was no further at all for another priest to arise according to the order of Melchizedek and not be said to be according to the order of Aaron.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
 HEB	7	11	jt8l	figs-abstractnouns	τίς ἔτι χρεία	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **need**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “need” or an adjective such as “necessary.” Alternate translation: “why was it still necessary” or “why was it needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	11	kmfw	figs-explicit	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι?	1		Here the author is referring back to the words that he quoted in [5:6](../05/06.md) from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md): “You are a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” It is these words that “say” that Jesus is a priest **according to the order of Melchizedek* and not **according to the order of Aaron**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to the quotation. Alternate translation: “for another to arise who, according to the Psalm, serves according to the order of Melchizedek and is not said to serve not according to the order of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	11	hi4e	figs-metaphor	ἀνίστασθαι	1	to arise	Here, the word **arise** refers to someone taking a position as if they were standing up to do something. The author speaks in this way to show that **another priest** has “stood up” to do his task as priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “appear” or “begin serving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-HEB	7	11	cc5f	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ…κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν	1	after the manner of Melchizedek	Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and perform the same duties that that person did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest … in the same way that Aaron was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood … having a priesthood just like Aaron’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+HEB	7	11	kmfw	figs-explicit	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι?	1		Here the author is referring back to the words that he quoted in [5:6](../05/06.md) from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md): “You are a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” It is these words that “say” that Jesus is a priest **according to the order of Melchizedek* and not **according to the order of Aaron**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to the quotation. Alternate translation: “for another to arise who, according to the psalm, serves according to the order of Melchizedek and is not said to serve according to the order of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	7	11	hi4e	figs-metaphor	ἀνίστασθαι	1	to arise	Here, the word **arise** refers to someone taking a position as if they were standing up to do something. The author speaks in this way to show that **another priest** has “stood up” to do his task as priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to appear” or “to begin serving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	7	11	cc5f	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ…κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν	1	after the manner of Melchizedek	Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and performs the same duties which that person did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest … in the same way that Aaron was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood … having a priesthood just like Aaron’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	11	b4n2	translate-names	Μελχισέδεκ…Ἀαρὼν	1		Here, the word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man, the same one about whom the author has been speaking. The word **Aaron** is also the name of a man. He was the first descendant of “Levi” who served as a priest, and the rest of the priests are descended from him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	11	kt3a	figs-activepassive	οὐ…λέγεσθαι	1	not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is not **said** rather than focusing on what does not do the “saying.” If you must state who does not “say,” the author implies that “God” did not say this when he spoke in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “for the psalm not to identify him to be” or “for God to say that he is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	7	12	wawz	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation and support for the idea that the “basis” of the **law** is the **priesthood** (see [7:11](../07/11.md)). The author’s point is that, because a **change of the law** occurs whenever the **priesthood is changed**, that means that the **priesthood** must be the basis for the **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further support for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “You can tell that the priesthood is the basis of the law, because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -797,18 +797,18 @@ HEB	7	12	lipz	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἱερωσύνης	1		If your language
 HEB	7	12	s8qi	figs-idiom	ἐξ ἀνάγκης	1		Here, the phrase **from necessity** indicates that what follows “must” or “has to” happen. The phrase does not clarify why what follows is a **necessity**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates obligation or certainty. Alternate translation: “it is required that” or “it follows that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	12	e8av	figs-abstractnouns	ἐξ ἀνάγκης καὶ νόμου μετάθεσις γίνεται	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **necessity**, **change**, or **place**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the law also needs to be changed” or “it is required that the law also changes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	13	mwx4	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has implied: there has indeed been a change in the priesthood (see [7:11–12](../07/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “Now the priesthood has been changed, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	13	k9zi	writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ὃν…λέγεται ταῦτα…μετέσχηκεν	1	For the one	Here, the words **he** and **whom** both refer to Jesus, to whom the author has applied the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). The author does not refer to Jesus by name here because he uses “the Lord” in the next verse and because he emphatically uses Jesus’ name in [7:22](../07/22.md). If possible, refer to Jesus here as indirectly as the author does. If you must clarify to whom **he** and **whom** refer, you could use a word or phrase that directly identifies Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord about whom these things are said belongs to” or “Jesus, about whom these things are said, belongs to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	13	m9mm	figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ ὃν…λέγεται ταῦτα	1	about whom these things are said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the “saying,” the author implies that “God” did it in the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “about whom God said these things” or “about whom we read these things in the Psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	7	13	nmdl	figs-extrainfo	φυλῆς ἑτέρας	1		Here, the phrase **tribe** refers to all those people who are descended from one of Jacob’s twelve sons. The author refers to **another tribe** to show that Jesus is not from the **tribe** of Levi. He will state which tribe Jesus is from in the next verse, so do not identify whose **tribe** the author speaks of until the next verse. Alternate translation: “one of the other tribes” or “a tribe that is not connected with Levi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+HEB	7	13	k9zi	writing-pronouns	ἐφ’ ὃν…λέγεται ταῦτα…μετέσχηκεν	1	For the one	Here, the words **he** and **whom** both refer to Jesus, to whom the author has applied the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). The author does not refer to Jesus by name here, because he uses “the Lord” in the next verse and because he emphatically uses Jesus’ name in [7:22](../07/22.md). If possible, refer to Jesus here as indirectly as the author does. If you must clarify to whom **he** and **whom** refer, you could use a word or phrase that directly identifies Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord about whom these things are said belongs to” or “Jesus, about whom these things are said, belongs to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	13	m9mm	figs-activepassive	ἐφ’ ὃν…λέγεται ταῦτα	1	about whom these things are said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the “saying,” the author implies that “God” did it in the words of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “about whom God said these things” or “about whom we read these things in the psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+HEB	7	13	nmdl	figs-extrainfo	φυλῆς ἑτέρας	1		Here, the phrase **tribe** refers to all those people who are descended from one of Jacob’s twelve sons. The author refers to **another tribe** to show that Jesus is not from the **tribe** of Levi. He will state which tribe Jesus is from in the next verse, so do not identify of whose **tribe** the author speaks until the next verse. Alternate translation: “one of the other tribes” or “a tribe that is not connected with Levi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
 HEB	7	13	n3hs	figs-idiom	προσέσχηκεν τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ	1		Here, the phrase **officiated at the altar** is another way to say that someone has served or functioned as a priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to acting as a priest. Alternate translation: “has functioned as priest” or “has done priestly work at God’s altar” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	14	t3dm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1	Now	Here, the word **For** introduces further, more specific explanation of what the author claimed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more specific information. Alternate translation: “More specifically,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	14	mxj1		πρόδηλον	1		Here, the phrase **{it is} obvious** indicates that what follows is common knowledge, that is, information that the author assumes his audience already knows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that introduces common knowledge. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” or “it is commonly known”
-HEB	7	14	qsk5	figs-metaphor	ἐξ Ἰούδα ἀνατέταλκεν	1	it is from Judah that our Lord was born	Here the author describes Jesus’ birth as if he were the sun that “sprang up” above the horizon at sunrise. He speaks in this way to refer to Jesus’s birth as a descendant of **Judah** but also to indicate that Jesus’s birth was not completely normal. Since Jesus was born by the power of the Holy Spirit without a human father, the author uses a less common phrase to refer to the person from he whom he is descended. If possible, use a comparable phrase in your language that refers to human descent but that also indicates that Jesus’s birth was not totally normal. Alternate translation: “has come from Judah” or “has sprouted from Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB	7	14	qsk5	figs-metaphor	ἐξ Ἰούδα ἀνατέταλκεν	1	it is from Judah that our Lord was born	Here the author describes Jesus’ birth as if he were the sun that “sprang up” above the horizon at sunrise. He speaks in this way to refer to Jesus’ birth as a descendant of **Judah** but also to indicate that Jesus’ birth was not completely normal. Since Jesus was born by the power of the Holy Spirit without a human father, the author uses a less common phrase to refer to the person from whom he is descended. If possible, use a comparable phrase in your language that refers to human descent but that also indicates that Jesus’ birth was not totally normal. Alternate translation: “has come from Judah” or “has sprouted from Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	7	14	ln94	translate-names	ἐξ Ἰούδα…Μωϋσῆς	1	from Judah	Here, the word **Judah** is the name of a man. He was one of the great-grandsons of Abraham. Here, the author uses the name **Judah** to refer to the **tribe** of people who are descended from **Judah**. The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God used him to give the law to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	7	14	fh67	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν Μωϋσῆς ἐλάλησεν	1		Here the author refers to the law that **Moses** received from God and gave to the people of Israel. This law contained instructions about who would serve as priests, and the only instructions that Moses received were about how people from the tribe of Levi would serve as priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote nothing in the law” or “God gave Moses nothing to say in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	14	onns	figs-explicit	περὶ ἱερέων οὐδὲν	1		Here, the phrase **nothing concerning priests** indicates that the law of **Moses** contains no instructions or indications about people from the tribe of **Judah** serving as priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “nothing about some of them acting as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	15	uf6c	writing-pronouns	ἐστιν	1		Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the author’s claim that God changed the priesthood. Alternate translation: “the change in priesthood is” or “the fact that God has changed the priesthood is” (2) more generally to what the author is arguing about Jesus and the priests who are descended from Levi. Alternate translation: “what I am arguing is” or “what I have said is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	15	jn1p		καὶ περισσότερον ἔτι κατάδηλόν ἐστιν	1	What we say is clearer yet	Here, the phrase **still even more obvious** is a stronger form of the phrase “{it is} obvious” in [7:14](../07/14.md). The author’s point is that everyone must acknowledge that **this** (see the previous note) is true given that the following **if** statement is also true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that everyone must agree with. Alternate translation: “And everyone must agree that this is true” or “And everyone knows that this is surely correct”
+HEB	7	15	jn1p		καὶ περισσότερον ἔτι κατάδηλόν ἐστιν	1	What we say is clearer yet	Here, the phrase **still even more obvious** is a stronger form of the phrase “{it is} obvious” in [7:14](../07/14.md). The author’s point is that everyone must acknowledge that **this** (see the previous note) is true, given that the following **if** statement is also true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that everyone must agree with. Alternate translation: “And everyone must agree that this is true” or “And everyone knows that this is surely correct”
 HEB	7	15	md9i	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…ἀνίσταται ἱερεὺς ἕτερος	1	if another priest arises	Here the author is speaking as if **another priest** “emerging” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “because” or “since.” Alternate translation: “now that another priest has emerged” or “because another priest has emerged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
 HEB	7	15	i17g	figs-explicit	ἱερεὺς ἕτερος	1	General Information:	Here, the phrase **another priest** refers to Jesus, who is a different kind of **priest** than the priests who are descended from Levi. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the phrase refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is a different priest,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	15	chxb	figs-metaphor	ἀνίσταται	1		Here the author speaks of how Jesus has become a priest as if he were a person “emerging” from underneath a covering or screen. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus became a **priest** at a specific point in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to becoming a priest. Alternate translation: “takes office” or “begins to serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ HEB	7	15	z1yl	translate-unknown	κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχι
 HEB	7	15	afqi	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχισέδεκ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **likeness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “like” or “similar.” Alternate translation: “who is like Melchizedek” or “who is similar to Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	16	nt6b	writing-pronouns	ὃς…γέγονεν	1		Here, the word **who** refers back to the phrase “another priest” in the previous verse ([7:15](../07/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to “another priest.” If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That priest has become one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	16	fr4a	figs-infostructure	οὐ κατὰ νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης…ἀλλὰ κατὰ δύναμιν ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου	1	It was not based on the law	If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “according to the power of an indestructible life, not according to a law of a fleshly command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	7	16	erq7	figs-possession	νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης	1	the law of fleshly descent	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that **a law** that includes **a fleshly command**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “according to a fleshly command in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+HEB	7	16	erq7	figs-possession	νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης	1	the law of fleshly descent	Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that **a law** includes **a fleshly command**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “according to a fleshly command in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 HEB	7	16	el4j	figs-explicit	ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης	1		Here, the phrase **fleshly command** refers to a **command** that could: (1) deal with what is **fleshly**, specifically how humans have children. In other words, the **command** relates to how priests need to be descended from Levi. Alternate translation: “of a command about physical descent” (2) apply to people who are **fleshly**, that is, those who are alive now and who do not have resurrected bodies. Alternate translation: “of command that deals with this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	16	l4mg	figs-abstractnouns	ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “that commands what is fleshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	16	kw1a	figs-possession	κατὰ δύναμιν ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου	1		Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that **power** comes from or is based in the **indestructible life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “according to the power that comes from an indestructible life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -824,38 +824,38 @@ HEB	7	16	oiwa	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ δύναμιν ζωῆς ἀκατα
 HEB	7	16	m4kl	figs-explicit	ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου	1		Here, the phrase **indestructible life** refers to how Jesus died but then resurrected and is alive again. The phrase also explains what being a priest “forever” (see [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md)) means. The author will cite this psalm again in the following verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **indestructible life** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “of a life that death could not destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	17	xmj8	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For scripture witnesses about him	Here, the word **For** introduces the evidence or proof that Jesus has become a priest “according to the power of an indestructible life” (see [7:16](../07/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “You know that is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	7	17	gqya	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρεῖται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **testified** rather than focusing on who or what does the “testifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it when he spoke [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “God is testifying” or “the psalm is testifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	7	17	t8nv	writing-quotations	μαρτυρεῖται	1		Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that has been **testified**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “it is being testified in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	7	17	t8nv	writing-quotations	μαρτυρεῖται	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that has been **testified**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “it is being testified in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	7	17	oo1b	figs-quotations	μαρτυρεῖται…ὅτι σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is being testified that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	7	17	g6zd		σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ	1	according to the order of Melchizedek	Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [5:6](../05/06.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
 HEB	7	18	bzht	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what the quote in the previous verse means. The phrase **on the one hand** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “on the other hand” in [7:19b](../07/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce a two-part explanation. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to follow something like the alternate translation for “on the other hand” in 7:19b. Alternate translation: “First then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	18	dm50	figs-abstractnouns	ἀθέτησις…γίνεται προαγούσης ἐντολῆς	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **annulment** and **commandment**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “annul” and “command.” Alternate translation: “what was formerly commanded is annulled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	18	x8tw	figs-explicit	προαγούσης ἐντολῆς	1		Here, the phrase **the former commandment** identifies what God commanded Moses to tell the people about how the descendants of Levi would serve as priests and what they would do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the former commandment about the Levitical priesthood” or “of the former commandment concerning priests in Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	18	ez4i	figs-doublet	ἀσθενὲς, καὶ ἀνωφελές	1		These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how ineffective the “former commandment” was. If your language does not use repetition to do this, or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “is very weak” or “cannot accomplish anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-HEB	7	19	t5w7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces support for how the “former commandment” is “weak and useless” (see [7:18](../07/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “indeed,” or “that is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
+HEB	7	19	t5w7	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **for** introduces support for how the “former commandment” is “weak and useless” (see [7:18](../07/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “indeed,” or “that is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	7	19	ia8j	figs-personification	οὐδὲν…ἐτελείωσεν ὁ νόμος	1	the law made nothing perfect	Here the author speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who was ineffective and could “perfect” nothing. He speaks in this way to indicate that the system of laws that God gave through Moses, particularly the laws about priests, did not lead to people or things becoming “perfect.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the law was not something that people could follow to become perfect” or “nothing was perfected through Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
 HEB	7	19	otzd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, the phrase **on the other hand** introduces the second part of the author’s explanation. Make sure you translate this phrase so that it works well with how you translated “on the one hand” in [7:18](../07/18.md). Alternate translation: “and second, there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	19	stc2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπεισαγωγὴ…κρείττονος ἐλπίδος	1	a better hope is introduced	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **introduction** and **hope**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “introduce” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “God introduces something better for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	19	xp1h	figs-metonymy	κρείττονος ἐλπίδος	1	a better hope is introduced	Here, the word **hope** refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the better things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 HEB	7	19	c9tz	figs-go	ἐγγίζομεν τῷ Θεῷ	1	through which we come near to God	Here, the phrase **come near** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to approach God in heaven. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “we go before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-HEB	7	20	e97r	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put the background information about how the Israelite priests were not appointed with an oath while Jesus was appointed with an oath in a first sentence. Then, you could put the comparison between how Jesus was appointed with an oath and how he is the guarantor of a better covenant in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For indeed they without swearing an oath are become priests, but he with an oath-taking, through God saying to him, “The Lord swore and will not change his mind: ‘You are a priest forever.’” So, by as much as not without swearing an oath,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
+HEB	7	20	e97r	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put in a first sentence the background information about how the Israelite priests were not appointed with an oath while Jesus was appointed with an oath. Then, you could put the comparison between how Jesus was appointed with an oath and how he is the guarantor of a better covenant in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For indeed they, without swearing an oath, are become priests, but he with an oath-taking, through God saying to him, “The Lord swore and will not change his mind: ‘You are a priest forever.’” So, by as much as not without swearing an oath,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
 HEB	7	20	f3cd	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καθ’ ὅσον	1	General Information:	Here, the phrase **by as much as** introduces the first half a comparison that the author will complete in [7:22](../07/22.md). The point is that, just as **swearing an oath** is more guaranteed than not using an oath, so Jesus’ priesthood and covenant are better than the priesthood of the descendants of Levi. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a comparison between two situations or concepts. Alternate translation: “just as it was” or “in the same way that it was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	20	ziqe	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ χωρὶς ὁρκωμοσίας	1		The phrase **not without swearing an oath** uses two negative words to emphasize that there was definitely an **oath** involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with positive words, emphasizing the importance of **swearing an oath**. Alternate translation: “with swearing an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
 HEB	7	20	vf69	figs-explicit	οὐ χωρὶς ὁρκωμοσίας	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here the author again refers to [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md), which states that the Lord “swears” that “you are a priest forever.” The author quotes this psalm again in the following verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the content of the **oath** explicit. Alternate translation: “not without swearing an oath about the priesthood of the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	20	v343	figs-infostructure	ὁρκωμοσίας, οἱ μὲν γὰρ χωρὶς ὁρκωμοσίας εἰσὶν ἱερεῖς γεγονότες,	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here the author begins a comment about the **oath** and priests. This comment continues to the end of [7:21](../07/21.md). The ULT has used em-dashes to make it clear that these words are extra information that explain **not without swearing an oath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that the author is about to give extra explanatory information. If you do, make sure that you properly signal the end of this extra information at the end of [7:22](../07/22.md). Alternate translation: “swearing an oath—by the way, they indeed without swearing an oath are become priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
-HEB	7	20	atus	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν γὰρ	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of about why it is important there was an **oath**. The word **indeed** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “but” in [7:21a](../07/21.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce a two-part explanation. Alternate translation: “now on the one hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
-HEB	7	20	jrue	writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the word **they** refers to the priests who are descended from Levi about whom God gave laws through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Levitical priests. Alternate translation: “the Levitical priests” or “the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+HEB	7	20	atus	grammar-connect-words-phrases	μὲν γὰρ	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation of about why it is important that there was an **oath**. The word **indeed** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “but” in [7:21a](../07/21.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce a two-part explanation. Alternate translation: “now on the one hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	7	20	jrue	writing-pronouns	οἱ	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the word **they** refers to the priests who are descended from Levi, about whom God gave laws through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Levitical priests. Alternate translation: “the Levitical priests” or “the Levites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	20	n5bi	figs-explicit	χωρὶς ὁρκωμοσίας εἰσὶν ἱερεῖς γεγονότες	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here the author points out that God did not “swear” an **oath** when he appointed the descendants of Levi to be priests. Instead, he gave laws and regulations through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the author is claiming more explicit. Alternate translation: “are appointed priests by God without him swearing an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	21	q1vm	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the word **but** introduces the second part of the author’s explanation. Make sure you translate this word so that it works well with how you translated “indeed” in [7:20](../07/20.md). Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	21	y3uo	figs-ellipsis	ὁ…μετὰ	1	And it was not without an oath!	This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse ([7:20](../07/20.md)). Alternate translation: “he became a priest with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 HEB	7	21	hook	writing-pronouns	ὁ…μετὰ ὁρκωμοσίας διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the words **he** and **him** refer to Jesus the Son. The phrase **the one saying** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronouns refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Son with an oath-taking, through God the Father saying to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	7	21	ythb	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ ὁρκωμοσίας διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **oath-taking**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “taking an oath.” Alternate translation: “through God taking an oath when he said to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	7	21	fzr9	writing-quotations	διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to Christ. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to Christ, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “through the one speaking to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	7	21	fzr9	writing-quotations	διὰ τοῦ λέγοντος πρὸς αὐτόν	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to Christ. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to Christ, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “through the one speaking to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	7	21	o4wg	figs-quotations	πρὸς αὐτόν, ὤμοσεν Κύριος, καὶ οὐ μεταμεληθήσεται, σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα;	1	And it was not without an oath!	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the quotation as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “to him that the Lord swore and will not change his mind, saying that he is a priest forever—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	7	21	zw04	figs-123person	ὤμοσεν Κύριος, καὶ οὐ μεταμεληθήσεται	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, God speaks the quotation, but the **Lord** in the quotation is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person instead. Alternate translation: “I, the Lord, swore and will not change my mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 HEB	7	21	xbtg	figs-idiom	οὐ μεταμεληθήσεται	1	And it was not without an oath!	Here, the phrase **change his mind** refers to how somebody first decides to do one thing but then later decides to do something different. The quotation indicates that **the Lord** will not decide to do something different. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “will not revoke what he has said” or “will not decide to do something different” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	7	21	qtfs	figs-quotesinquotes	οὐ μεταμεληθήσεται, σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	And it was not without an oath!	If a direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “will not change his mind, swearing that you are a priest forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
 HEB	7	21	e5v1		σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	And it was not without an oath!	Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [7:17](../07/17.md) (although he does not include the phrase “according to the order of Melchizedek”), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse.
-HEB	7	22	h462	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κατὰ τοσοῦτο	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **according to so much more** introduces the second half of the comparison that the author began in the first part of [7:20](../07/20.md). The comparison indicates that the difference in greatness between a priesthood with an oath and a priesthood without an oath is comparable to the difference in greatness between the covenants that these priesthoods are part of. In other words, the covenant that Jesus “guarantees” is greater than the covenant that God gave through Moses, just like his priesthood that is guaranteed by an oath is greater than the priesthood that God gave to the descendants of Levi. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses a comparison between two situations or concepts. Alternate translation: “by that much” or “by so much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
+HEB	7	22	h462	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κατὰ τοσοῦτο	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, the phrase **according to so much more** introduces the second half of the comparison that the author began in the first part of [7:20](../07/20.md). The comparison indicates that the difference in greatness between a priesthood with an oath and a priesthood without an oath is comparable to the difference in greatness between the covenants of which these priesthoods are a part. In other words, the covenant that Jesus “guarantees” is greater than the covenant that God gave through Moses, just like his priesthood that is guaranteed by an oath is greater than the priesthood that God gave to the descendants of Levi. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses a comparison between two situations or concepts. Alternate translation: “by that much” or “by so much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	22	e23d	translate-unknown	γέγονεν ἔγγυος	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here, the word **guarantor** refers to a person who makes sure that people do what they promised or agreed to do. In other words, Jesus is the one who ensures that the **better covenant** be carried out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “ensures the fulfillment” or “makes certain the accomplishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	7	22	qn5c	figs-explicit	κρείττονος διαθήκης	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here the audience would have inferred that the **covenant** is **better** than the “old covenant,” the one that God gave through Moses to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of a covenant that is better than the covenant that God gave through Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	23	cdsy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ οἱ μὲν…γεγονότες	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here, the word **And** indicates that the author is adding a new point or topic to what he is discussing. The phrase **on the one hand** signals to the reader that this new point occurs in two contrasting parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that more clearly introduce a new point in two contrasting parts. Make sure that you express the second half of the contrast in [7:24](../07/24.md) so that it fits with what you do here. Alternate translation: “Now on the one hand, the ones having become” or “First, the ones having become” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@@ -865,8 +865,8 @@ HEB	7	23	vn5m	figs-abstractnouns	θανάτῳ	1	has given the guarantee of a be
 HEB	7	23	tfba	figs-explicit	παραμένειν	1	has given the guarantee of a better covenant	Here the author implies that they **are prevented {from} continuing** to be priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from continuing to be priests” or “from continuing to act as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	24	ywjc	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὁ δὲ	1	he has a permanent priesthood	Here, the words **but** and **on the other hand** introduce the second part of the contrast that the author began in [7:23](../07/23.md). Make sure you express the idea here in a way that matches how you introduced the first half of the contrast in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and on the other hand, he” or “but second, he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
 HEB	7	24	y2uu	writing-pronouns	ὁ	1	he has a permanent priesthood	Here, the word **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Son” or “Jesus the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	7	24	z20u	figs-explicit	μένειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	he has a permanent priesthood	Here, the phrase **he remains forever** means something similar to the phrase “indestructible life” in [7:16](../07/16.md): Jesus lives forever, that is, he will never die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “he remains alive forever” or “his life never ends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	7	24	u941	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπαράβατον ἔχει τὴν ἱερωσύνην	1	he has a permanent priesthood	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “imitate.” Alternate translation: “is permanently a priest” or “who permanently acts as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+HEB	7	24	z20u	figs-explicit	μένειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα	1	he has a permanent priesthood	Here, the phrase **he remains forever** means something similar to the phrase “indestructible life” in [7:16](../07/16.md): Jesus lives forever, that is, he will never die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “remains alive forever” or “lives without end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+HEB	7	24	u941	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπαράβατον ἔχει τὴν ἱερωσύνην	1	he has a permanent priesthood	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “imitate.” Alternate translation: “is permanently a priest” or “permanently acts as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	7	25	a4gg	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅθεν	1	Therefore he	Here, the phrase **because of which** introduces a conclusion based on the fact that Jesus has “the permanent priesthood” ([7:24](../07/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural form that introduces a conclusion. Alternate translation: “as a result of which” or “so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	7	25	sn4h	figs-explicit	σῴζειν εἰς τὸ παντελὲς	1	Therefore he	Here, the word **completely** identifies the way that Jesus “saves” people as something that he himself does totally and finally. In other words, he does not need someone else to assist him in “saving” his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to save entirely” or “to save all the way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	7	25	b182	figs-go	τοὺς προσερχομένους…τῷ Θεῷ	1	those who approach God through him	Here, the word **approaching** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author speaks of people **approaching God**. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “the ones going before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -930,7 +930,7 @@ HEB	8	5	k5r1	figs-activepassive	κεχρημάτισται Μωϋσῆς, μέλ
 HEB	8	5	ja1v	translate-unknown	κεχρημάτισται	1	It is just as Moses was warned by God when he was	Here, the word **warned** refers to receiving a message from God. This message could be a warning, an instruction, or a revelation. The main point is that the message requires a response. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to receiving a message from God. Alternate translation: “had been instructed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	8	5	agjf	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	μέλλων	1	It is just as Moses was warned by God when he was	Here, the phrase **being about** introduces something that happened at the same time as **Moses** was **warned**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “at the time when he was about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 HEB	8	5	qb7g	figs-explicit	μέλλων ἐπιτελεῖν τὴν σκηνήν	1	was about to construct the tabernacle	Here the author refers to how God revealed to Moses what the **tabernacle**, the sanctuary that the Israelites used when they were in the desert, should be like. Moses then told the Israelites how to **complete the tabernacle**. You can read the instructions that God gave to Moses about the tabernacle and its service in [Exodus 25–30](../exo/25/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “when he and the Israelites were going to construct the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	8	5	vbkq	writing-quotations	γάρ φησίν	1	was about to construct the tabernacle	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God said to Moses. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Exodus 25:40](../exo/25/40.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “as God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	8	5	vbkq	writing-quotations	γάρ φησίν	1	was about to construct the tabernacle	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God said to Moses. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Exodus 25:40](../exo/25/40.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “as God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	8	5	on9c	figs-quotations	ὅρα, γάρ φησίν, ποιήσεις πάντα κατὰ τὸν τύπον τὸν δειχθέντα σοι ἐν τῷ ὄρει;	1	was about to construct the tabernacle	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “for he says that Moses should see that he makes everything according to the type that was shown to him on the mountain.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	8	5	jk6i	figs-yousingular	ὅρα…ποιήσεις…σοι	1	See that	Because God is speaking to one person (Moses), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
 HEB	8	5	iym5	figs-idiom	ὅρα	1	See that	Here, the phrase **See that** calls attention to or emphasizes the command that follows. It does not mean that Moses was supposed to **See** with his eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that draws attention to the command. Alternate translation: “Be sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ HEB	8	7	np7l	figs-idiom	οὐκ ἂν δευτέρας ἐζητεῖτο τόπ
 HEB	8	7	pktf	figs-activepassive	οὐκ…ἐζητεῖτο τόπος	1	had been faultless	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **place** that is **sought** rather than focusing on the person doing the “seeking.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “no one would have sought a place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	8	8	ya4n	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	General Information:	Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has claimed about how the first covenant was not “faultless” (see [8:7](../08/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “We know that the first first covenant was not faultless, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	8	8	sqb4	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῖς	1	with the people	Here, the word **them** refers to the people with whom God made the “first covenant”: the people of Israel. The author may be referring specifically to the people whom God led out of Egypt, or he may be referring to all the people who lived under the “first covenant.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom **them** refers. Alternate translation: “with the Israelite ancestors” or “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-HEB	8	8	jd18	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	with the people	Here and in the following four verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “God spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	8	8	jd18	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	with the people	Here and in the following four verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken. However, the audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, specifically from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “God spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	8	8	ncqt	figs-quotations	λέγει, ἰδοὺ, ἡμέραι ἔρχονται, λέγει Κύριος, καὶ συντελέσω, ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα, διαθήκην καινήν;	1	with the people	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the following four verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “he says that you should behold, as days are coming, so he says, when he will complete a new covenant with the house of Israel and with the house of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	8	8	xhp8	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, ἡμέραι	1	See	The **Lord** is using the term **Behold** to focus the audience’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Listen! Days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 HEB	8	8	qzx8	figs-idiom	ἡμέραι ἔρχονται	1	See	Here, the clause **days are coming** indicates that some event is going to happen soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that anticipates that something is about to happen. Alternate translation: “the time will soon be here” or “it is almost the moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1160,7 +1160,7 @@ HEB	9	19	tgc2	translate-unknown	ἐρίου κοκκίνου	1	hyssop	Here, the
 HEB	9	19	nrn5	translate-unknown	ὑσσώπου	1	hyssop	The word **hyssop** refers to a woody plant with small leaves that can be used for sprinkling liquids by dipping the leaves in the liquid and then shaking them or brushing them over the target. If this plant is unknown, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “part of a plant with small branches and many leaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	9	19	zl8f	figs-explicit	τὸ βιβλίον	1	hyssop	Here, the word **scroll** refers to the roll or book on which Moses wrote everything that God had told him. You can read about this **scroll** in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md). These verses do not directly mention Moses sprinkling **the scroll**, but the author knew more about this than we do, and there is no reason to harmonize what he says with the story in Exodus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scroll of God’s words” or “the scroll of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	9	19	elh7	figs-rpronouns	αὐτό…τὸ βιβλίον	1	hyssop	Here, the word translated **itself** emphasizes **the scroll**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **the scroll** in your language. Alternate translation: “that very scroll” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
-HEB	9	20	e3lr	writing-quotations	λέγων	1	the blood of the covenant	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that Moses said to the people. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Exodus 24:8](../exo/24/08.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “and he spoke to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	9	20	e3lr	writing-quotations	λέγων	1	the blood of the covenant	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that Moses said to the people. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Exodus 24:8](../exo/24/08.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “and he spoke to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	9	20	lskz	figs-quotations	λέγων, τοῦτο τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης, ἧς ἐνετείλατο πρὸς ὑμᾶς ὁ Θεός	1	the blood of the covenant	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that this is the blood of the covenant that God commanded for you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]}
 HEB	9	20	k7kh	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1	the blood of the covenant	Here, the word **This** refers to the blood that Moses “sprinkled” (see [9:19](../09/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to the blood. Alternate translation: “This blood is” or “What I have sprinkled is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	9	20	j7en	figs-possession	τὸ αἷμα τῆς διαθήκης	1	the blood of the covenant	Here the author uses the possessive form to describe how **the blood** inaugurates or confirms **the covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the blood that confirms the covenant” or “the blood that inaugurates the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -1255,7 +1255,7 @@ HEB	10	4	bvu5	figs-doublet	ταύρων καὶ τράγων	1	the blood of bull
 HEB	10	5	q4ye	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὸ	1	General Information:	Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference based on what the author has said about how “blood of bulls and goats” does not “take away sins” (see [10:4](../10/04.md)). Because that is true, Jesus speaks the words that the author quotes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
 HEB	10	5	xp0e	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	εἰσερχόμενος	1	you did not desire	Here, the word **entering** introduces an action that could happen (1) at the same as he **says** the quotation that follows. Alternate translation: “as he enters” (2) before he **says** the quotation that follows. Alternate translation: “as he was about to enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
 HEB	10	5	coab	figs-explicit	εἰσερχόμενος εἰς τὸν κόσμον	1	you did not desire	Here, the phrase **entering into the world** refers to Jesus’ incarnation, when he became human and lived in the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “becoming human and entering into the world” or “entering into the world as a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	10	5	sp70	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	you did not desire	Here and in the following two verses, the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that Christ the Son said to God the Father. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 40:6–8](../psa/40/06.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “he says to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	10	5	sp70	writing-quotations	λέγει	1	you did not desire	Here and in the following two verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that Christ the Son said to God the Father. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 40:6–8](../psa/40/06.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “he says to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	5	wlz2	figs-quotations	λέγει, θυσίαν καὶ προσφορὰν οὐκ ἠθέλησας, σῶμα δὲ κατηρτίσω μοι.	1	you did not desire	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you also will need to translate the two following verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “he says that sacrifice and offering God did not desire, but a body God prepared for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]}
 HEB	10	5	kqdh	figs-doublet	θυσίαν καὶ προσφορὰν	1	you did not desire	These two terms mean basically the same thing. The author of the quotation uses both of them to show that he is referring to animal sacrifices in general. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use one phrase and make it general in another way. Alternate translation: “Sacrifices” or “Any kind of offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 HEB	10	5	ml8e	figs-yousingular	οὐκ ἠθέλησας…κατηρτίσω	1	you did not desire	Because Christ is speaking to one person (God the Father), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
@@ -1313,7 +1313,7 @@ HEB	10	14	tfmy		τετελείωκεν εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς τοὺς
 HEB	10	14	c298	figs-idiom	εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς	1	those who are being sanctified	Here, the phrase **for all time** identifies that something is always true or effective. In other words, there will never be a time when it is not true or effective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “forever” or “permanently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	10	14	dz9n	figs-activepassive	τοὺς ἁγιαζομένους	1	those who are being sanctified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “those whom God is sanctifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	10	15	qk8j	figs-explicit	μαρτυρεῖ…ἡμῖν	1	General Information:	Here the author does not state what the **Holy Spirit** is “testifying” about. He implies that it is what he said in the previous verses about how Jesus’ offering effectively removes sin and leads to holiness and perfection (see [10:12–14](../10/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “testifies to us that Christ takes away sins” or “testifies to us that Christ perfects his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-HEB	10	15	zhyi	writing-quotations	μετὰ γὰρ τὸ εἰρηκέναι	1	General Information:	Here the author introduces a quote from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that **the Holy Spirit** has **said** to **us**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “for after he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	10	15	zhyi	writing-quotations	μετὰ γὰρ τὸ εἰρηκέναι	1	General Information:	Here the author introduces a quote from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that **the Holy Spirit** has **said** to **us**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “for after he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	15	qt90	grammar-connect-time-sequential	μετὰ…τὸ εἰρηκέναι	1	General Information:	Here, the word **after** indicates that the author will refer to something that was **said** before something else was **said**. The first thing that was **said** could be: (1) all of [10:16](../10/16.md). The second thing is introduced by “And {then}” at the beginning of [10:17](../10/17.md). Alternate translation: “after he said these words from the Lord” (2) the first part of [10:16](../10/16.md), up to “says the Lord.” The second is introduced by “says the Lord” and continues to the end of [10:17](../10/17.md). Alternate translation: “after the Holy Spirit said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
 HEB	10	16	czh3	figs-quotations	αὕτη ἡ διαθήκη ἣν διαθήσομαι πρὸς αὐτοὺς μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας, λέγει Κύριος, διδοὺς νόμους μου ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς	1	with them	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. ]Alternate translation: “that this is the covenant that he will covenant with them after those days, so he says, putting his laws in their hearts, and he will write them on their mind.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	10	16	s783		αὕτη ἡ διαθήκη ἣν διαθήσομαι πρὸς αὐτοὺς μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας, λέγει Κύριος, διδοὺς νόμους μου ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς	1	after those days	These words are part of the quotation from [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md) that the author already quoted in [8:10](../08/10.md). Here, the author repeats the words he used there almost exactly. He changes “with the house of Israel” to “with them,” and he reverses the order in which “hearts’ and “mind” appear. Repeat the words you used in [8:10](../08/10.md), but make these two minor changes.
@@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ HEB	10	29	i6e6	translate-unknown	κοινὸν	1	the blood by which he was sanct
 HEB	10	29	hr3a	translate-unknown	ἐνυβρίσας	1	the blood by which he was sanctified	Here, the word **insulted** refers to mocking or making fun of someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to treating someone badly by making fun of them or saying bad things about them. Alternate translation: “having mocked” or “having spoken badly about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	10	29	qr6c	figs-explicit	τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς χάριτος	1	the Spirit of grace	Here, the word **Spirit** refers to God’s **Spirit**, the Holy Spirit. The author describes the Holy Spirit as **of grace** because the **Spirit** gives **grace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could more clearly refer to the Holy Spirit, who gives **grace**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit who gives grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 HEB	10	30	pu4n	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has said about how God will punish those who shame and dishonor the Son and the Spirit (see [10:29](../10/29.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “You can tell that is true, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-HEB	10	30	ynr1	writing-quotations	τὸν εἰπόντα…καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as quotations but instead introduces them as words that God has **said**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:35](../deu/32/35.md), and the second quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:36](../deu/32/36.md). The words **And again** are a normal way to include a closely related quotation. See how you translated **And again** in [1:5](../01/05.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If your readers would not know that these quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify them. Alternate translation: “the one who said … And he also said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	10	30	ynr1	writing-quotations	τὸν εἰπόντα…καὶ πάλιν	1		Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as quotations but instead introduces them as words that God has **said**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:35](../deu/32/35.md), and the second quotation comes from [Deuteronomy 32:36](../deu/32/36.md). The words **And again** are a normal way to include a closely related quotation. See how you translated **And again** in [1:5](../01/05.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If your readers would not know that these quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify them. Alternate translation: “the one who said … And he also said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	10	30	vub5	figs-quotations	τὸν εἰπόντα, ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω; καὶ πάλιν, κρινεῖ Κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ	1		If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentences as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “the one having said that vengeance is his; he will repay. And again that the Lord will judge his people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	10	30	v8ad	figs-abstractnouns	ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις	1	Vengeance belongs to me	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **Vengeance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “avenge.” Alternate translation: “I will avenge” or “Avenging is what I will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 HEB	10	30	pdw9	figs-metaphor	ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω	1	I will pay back	Here God speaks as if he were going to **pay** people **back** for what he owed them. God speaks in this way to indicate that the way he will punish people will match what they have done wrong, just like a repayment matches a debt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I will give people what they deserve” or “I will fittingly punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ HEB	11	5	r3yl	figs-activepassive	πίστει Ἑνὼχ μετετέθη	1	It w
 HEB	11	5	qlfz	translate-unknown	μετετέθη…μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν…τῆς μεταθέσεως	1	It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death	Here, the words **transferred** and **transfer** refer to a change in location from earth to heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word for this kind of change of location. Alternate translation: “was relocated … relocated him … his relocation” or “was lifted up … lifted him up … his lifting up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	5	ki2t	figs-idiom	τοῦ μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον	1	see death	Here, the phrase **see death** refers to experiencing death or dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that he did not experience death” or “so that he did not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 HEB	11	5	ob9p	figs-abstractnouns	θάνατον	1	see death	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “himself dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-HEB	11	5	gfnv	writing-quotations	καὶ	1	see death	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. While he does not introduce the quotation with any special words, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 5:24](../gen/05/24.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could use words that introduce a quotation from an important text. Alternate translation: “and as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “as it is said in Genesis,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	11	5	gfnv	writing-quotations	καὶ	1	see death	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. While he does not introduce the quotation with any special words, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 5:24](../gen/05/24.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could use words that introduce a quotation from an important text. Alternate translation: “and as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “as it is said in Genesis,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	11	5	d8cx	figs-quotations	καὶ οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο, διότι μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεός	1	see death	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and the Scriptures report that he was not found, because God transferred him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	11	5	r625	figs-activepassive	οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο	1	see death	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Enoch**, who **was not found**, rather than focusing on the people who could not “find” him. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “People did not find him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 HEB	11	5	wegt	figs-idiom	οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο	1	see death	Here, the phrase **He was not found** indicates that no one knew where Enoch was, because he was not on earth any longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is no longer in an area or space. Alternate translation: “He disappeared” or “He was gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1604,7 +1604,7 @@ HEB	11	17	dpik	figs-abstractnouns	τὰς ἐπαγγελίας	1	when he was te
 HEB	11	17	u7t2	translate-unknown	τὸν μονογενῆ	1	when he was tested	Here, the phrase **one and only** refers to a person’s only child. While Abraham had another son named Ishmael, **Isaac** was the only child that he had with his wife Sarah, and so he was the **one and only** child whom God had promised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies an only child. Alternate translation: “his only child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 HEB	11	18	rqmd	writing-pronouns	ὃν	1	to whom it had been said	Here, the word **whom** refers to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom **whom** refers explicit. Alternate translation: “which man Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 HEB	11	18	wy2j	figs-activepassive	ἐλαλήθη	1	to whom it had been said	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-HEB	11	18	za2s	writing-quotations	ἐλαλήθη	1	to whom it had been said	Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God said to Abraham. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 21:12](../gen/21/12.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “it was spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+HEB	11	18	za2s	writing-quotations	ἐλαλήθη	1	to whom it had been said	Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God said to Abraham. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 21:12](../gen/21/12.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “it was spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 HEB	11	18	k6s6	figs-quotations	ἐλαλήθη, ὅτι ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα;	1	to whom it had been said	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it was said that through Isaac his offspring would be named,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
 HEB	11	18	kqyh	translate-names	Ἰσαὰκ	1	to whom it had been said	The word **Isaac** is the name of a man. He was the only son of Abraham and Sarah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 HEB	11	18	g294	figs-activepassive	κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **offspring** that is **named** rather than focusing on the person doing the “naming.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people will name your offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
index 8a2f450005..951de4fc92 100644
--- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
-REV	front	intro	xx8l			0		# Introduction to Revelation<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Revelation<br><br>1. Opening (1:1-20)<br>2. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)<br>3. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)<br>4. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)<br>5. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)<br>6. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)<br>7. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)<br>8. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)<br>9. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)<br>10. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)<br>11. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?<br><br>The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.<br><br>### What is the Book of Revelation about?<br><br>John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?<br><br>John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Are the events of Revelation past or future?<br><br>Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.<br><br>Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.<br><br>### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?<br><br>No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?<br><br>One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?<br><br>The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:<br><br>* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)<br>* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)<br>* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”<br><br>The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.<br><br>### Periods of time<br><br>John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.<br><br>### The verb “Behold” which occurs often in the book of Revelation<br><br>**Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say or do. The word literally means “look!” or “see!” However, in this case, the expression denotes the act of seeing figuratively by means of giving notice and attention. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?<br><br>For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”<br>* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”<br>* “so that a third of it \\[the earth\\] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.<br>* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”<br>* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).<br>* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”<br>* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”<br>* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”<br>* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+REV	front	intro	xx8l			0		# Introduction to Revelation<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the Book of Revelation<br><br>1. Opening (1:1-20)<br>2. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)<br>3. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)<br>4. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)<br>5. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)<br>6. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)<br>7. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)<br>8. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)<br>9. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)<br>10. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)<br>11. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)<br><br>### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?<br><br>The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.<br><br>### What is the Book of Revelation about?<br><br>John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?<br><br>John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### Are the events of Revelation past or future?<br><br>Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.<br><br>Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.<br><br>### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?<br><br>No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?<br><br>One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?<br><br>The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:<br><br>* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)<br>* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)<br>* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”<br><br>The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.<br><br>### Periods of time<br><br>John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.<br><br>### The verb “Behold” which occurs often in the book of Revelation<br><br>**Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say or do. The word literally means “look!” or “see!” However, in this case, the expression denotes the act of seeing figuratively by means of giving notice and attention. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?<br><br>For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.<br><br>* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”<br>* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”<br>* “so that a third of it \\[the earth\\] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.<br>* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”<br>* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).<br>* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”<br>* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”<br>* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”<br>* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
 REV	1	intro	u1e2			0		# Revelation 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>### Outline of Chapter One of Revelation<br><br>I. The Introduction to Revelation<br><br>A. The Prologue (1:1-8)<br><br>1. The Preface (1:1-3)<br>2. The Address and the Doxology (1:4-6)<br>3. The Book’s Theme (1:7-8)<br><br>II. John’s Vision of Christ<br><br>B. John’s Appointment to Write the Book of Revelation (1:9-20)<br><br>1. The Initial Appointment to Write (1:9-11)<br>2. The Source of the Appointment (1:12-16)<br>3. The Appointment Repeated and Elaborated (1:17-20)<br><br>This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven churches<br><br>John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.<br><br>### White<br><br>The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”<br><br>God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Blood<br><br>Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “He is coming with the clouds”<br><br>Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.<br><br>### “One like a son of man”<br><br>This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”<br><br>### “The angels of the seven churches”<br><br>The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.<br><br>### The word “to keep” or “to obey”<br><br>The word “to keep” means “to pay attention to” or “to heed” or “to obey”. There are various ways to render the idea or meaning of this word “to keep” as a frequent idiomatic expression in the book of Revelation. Basically, the meaning of this idiom which can vary depending on the context of the book of Revelation. For example, see how you translated “to keep” in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md). If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to take to heart” or “to continually consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 REV	1	1	rkh9	figs-abstractnouns	ἀποκάλυψις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What God disclosed to Jesus Christ” or “The matters that God revealed to Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 REV	1	1	kv41	figs-possession	ἀποκάλυψις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	General Information:	This phrase could mean: (1) this book is **revelation** that came to Jesus from God. Alternate translation: “revelation to Jesus Christ” (2) this book is **revelation** that came from Jesus to the author of the book, namely John. Alternate translation: “revelation from Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -25,12 +25,12 @@ REV	1	4	y9yh	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀ
 REV	1	4	lsun	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **grace** and **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May the one who is, and who was, and who is coming treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 REV	1	4	unul	figs-explicit	ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1		These three phrases all refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the God who is, and who was, and who is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	1	4	qsu6	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἐρχόμενος	1	who is to come	Here, the phrase **who is coming** could refer to: (1) the future tense, to complete the idea that God exists in the past, present, and future. In other words, John uses **is coming** figuratively to state that God will exist in the future. Alternate translation: “who will be” or “who will still exist in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) the physical act of coming, when God will be present on earth for a final judgment.
-REV	1	4	x38p	writing-symlanguage	ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων	1	seven spirits	The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection. Here, the **seven spirits** could refer to: (1) The Spirit of God that is described with seven attributes in [Isaiah 11:2](../../isa/11/02.md). Alternate translation: “the sevenfold Holy Spirit”. (2) Seven individual spirits which serve God and that also might be the “seven angels” in [8:2](../08/02.md). Alternate translation: “the seven spirit beings” or “the seven angelic spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	1	4	x38p	writing-symlanguage	ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων	1	seven spirits	The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection. Here, the **seven spirits** could refer to: (1) The Spirit of God that is described with seven attributes in [Isaiah 11:2](../isa/11/02.md). Alternate translation: “the sevenfold Holy Spirit”. (2) Seven individual spirits which serve God and that also might be the “seven angels” in [8:2](../08/02.md). Alternate translation: “the seven spirit beings” or “the seven angelic spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	1	5	w24x		καὶ ἀπὸ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	and from Jesus Christ	The first half of this verse continues the sentence from the previous verse. If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And may grace be to you and peace also from Jesus Christ”
-REV	1	5	gz2n		ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστός	1		This phrase **the faithful witness** is a title describing Jesus Christ. The phrase probably comes from [Psalm 89:37](../../psa/89/37.md). Likewise, every title that is describing Jesus Christ in this verse comes from Psalm 89, including: **the firstborn from the dead** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. Psalm 89 itself refers to the promises that God gave to David in [2 Samuel 7](../../2sa/07/01.md). So all of these titles describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises to David. You may want to include some of this information in a footnote. You may also want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or indentation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-REV	1	5	l3h8	figs-idiom	ὁ πρωτότοκος τῶν νεκρῶν	1	the firstborn from the dead	This phrase **the firstborn from the dead** is an idiom meaning “the first person to die and become alive again”. The phrase probably alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the first person to be raised from death” or “the first person to come back to life to never die again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV	1	5	gz2n	writing-quotations	ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστός	1		This phrase **the faithful witness** is a title describing Jesus Christ. The phrase probably comes from [Psalm 89:37](../psa/89/37.md). Likewise, every title that is describing Jesus Christ in this verse comes from Psalm 89, including: **the firstborn from the dead** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. Psalm 89 itself refers to the promises that God gave to David in [2 Samuel 7](../2sa/07/01.md). So all of these titles describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises to David. You may want to include some of this information in a footnote. You may also want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or indentation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV	1	5	l3h8	figs-idiom	ὁ πρωτότοκος τῶν νεκρῶν	1	the firstborn from the dead	This phrase **the firstborn from the dead** is an idiom meaning “the first person to die and become alive again”. The phrase probably alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../psa/89/27.md). If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the first person to be raised from death” or “the first person to come back to life to never die again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 REV	1	5	j1xp	grammar-collectivenouns	τῶν νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	The word **dead** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from those who are dead” or “from those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-REV	1	5	gqw8	grammar-collectivenouns	καὶ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς	1		This phrase **the ruler of the kings of the earth** is a title of Jesus Christ that describes his future dominion over the earth. This phrase alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). As with the previous phrases from [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md), you may want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or formatting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV	1	5	gqw8	writing-quotations	καὶ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς	1		This phrase **the ruler of the kings of the earth** is a title of Jesus Christ that describes his future dominion over the earth. This phrase alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../psa/89/27.md). As with the previous phrases from [Psalm 89](../psa/89/01.md), you may want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or formatting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 REV	1	5	ttqn	figs-infostructure	τῷ ἀγαπῶντι ἡμᾶς	1		A new sentence begins here that continues through the rest of the next verse. This sentence praises Jesus Christ. If it is helpful for your readers, you may want to state the main verb here at the beginning of the sentence and then repeat it again in the next verse. You may also want to break this long sentence into two or more shorter sentences. Alternate translation: “May Jesus Christ receive glory and power always because he loves us” or “May Jesus Christ receive glory and power always. He is the one who loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
 REV	1	5	tqfs	writing-pronouns	τῷ	1		Here, **the one** refers to Jesus Christ. If this is not clear to your readers, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “To Jesus Christ, who loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 REV	1	5	u6v7	figs-metaphor	λύσαντι ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1	has released us	Here John uses **released** figuratively of forgiving people for their **sins**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “has forgiven us for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ REV	1	5	jpnq	figs-metonymy	ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν	1		John u
 REV	1	5	q64f	figs-metonymy	τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **blood** figuratively represents the death of Christ on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a comparable word that stands for death or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	1	6	nhfb	figs-metaphor	βασιλείαν	1		Here, **a kingdom** functions as a metaphor for the unity that believers have as they belong to each other and to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning of **kingdom** here explicitly. Alternate translation: “a group that belongs to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	1	6	iq7j	figs-metaphor	ἱερεῖς	1		Here, the word **priests** functions as a metaphor for people who live to serve God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “people who work” or “people who live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	1	6	nesy	figs-abstractnouns	βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ— αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for **glory** or **power**, you could express these ideas in other ways. Here, **power** refers to the authority that Jesus has to rule over his kingdom. Alternate translation: “may people glorify Jesus always and may he rule over everyone” or “may people honor Jesus always and may he reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV	1	6	nesy	figs-abstractnouns	βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ— αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for **glory** or **power**, you could express these ideas in other ways. Here, **power** refers to the authority that Jesus has to rule over his kingdom. Alternate translation: “may people glorify Jesus and may he rule over everyone” or “may people honor Jesus always and may he reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 REV	1	6	ne7x	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ	1	his God and Father	Here, the words **God** and **Father** refer to one person, not two. This is God the Father who exists with the Son and the Holy Spirit as God. The name **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “for God, his Father” or “for God, who is the Father of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
 REV	1	7	ldv8	figs-quotemarks	ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν, καὶ ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	General Information:	The clauses **Behold, he is coming with the clouds**, **every eye will see him, even those who pierced him**, and **will mourn because of him** are quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
 REV	1	7	mx1c	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Here, **Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	1	7	bbqj	writing-pronouns	ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν	1		The pronoun **he** here refers to Jesus Christ. If this is unclear to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus is coming with the clouds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-REV	1	7	isa6		ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν	1		This phrase probably refers to [Daniel 7:13](../../dan/07/13.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
+REV	1	7	isa6		ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν	1		This phrase probably refers to [Daniel 7:13](../dan/07/13.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
 REV	1	7	k0qo		ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν	1		Alternate translation: “He approaches on the clouds”
-REV	1	7	nxqe		ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς	1		These phrases probably refer to [Zechariah 12:10](../../Zech/12/10.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
+REV	1	7	nxqe		ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς	1		These phrases probably refer to [Zechariah 12:10](../Zech/12/10.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
 REV	1	7	hb4i	figs-synecdoche	πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς	1	every eye	Since people see with their eyes, the word **eye** is used to refer to people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person” or “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
 REV	1	7	ndf6	figs-metonymy	καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν	1	pierced him	Jesus’ hands and feet were **pierced** when he was nailed to the cross and a soldier **pierced** his side with a spear. Here **those who pierced him** refers to the people who killed him. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “even those who pierced and killed him” or “even those who stabbed him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	1	7	ewtl	figs-ellipsis	καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν	1		John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “even those who pierced him will see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -65,15 +65,15 @@ REV	1	9	o6k9	figs-metaphor	ἐν Ἰησοῦ	1		Here John pictures **Jesus** as
 REV	1	9	c1a9	figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	because of the word of God	John uses **word of God** figuratively to describe the gospel message that came from God and that John proclaimed by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	1	9	sim8	figs-possession	τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ	1	the testimony about Jesus	John is using the possessive form to describe the **testimony** about **Jesus** that John proclaimed. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the testimony that I proclaimed about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 REV	1	10	s2sw	figs-idiom	ἐγενόμην ἐν Πνεύματι	1	I was in the Spirit	Here, **in the Spirit** could mean: (1) God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit) took control of John in order to influence John to receive divine revelation. Alternate translation: “I was influenced by the Spirit of God” or “God’s Spirit took control of me” (2) God caused John’s spirit to be in a state so that he could perceive revelation. Alternate translation: “God influenced my spirit” or “God took control of my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV	1	10	lnj2		τῇ Κυριακῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	the Lord’s day	Here, **the Lord’s day** refers specifically to Sunday, which was the day of the week when believers gathered to worship together in honor of the Lord’s resurrection. If this is unclear to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Sunday, the Lord’s day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV	1	10	lnj2	figs-explicit	τῇ Κυριακῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	the Lord’s day	Here, **the Lord’s day** refers specifically to Sunday, which was the day of the week when believers gathered to worship together in honor of the Lord’s resurrection. If this is unclear to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Sunday, the Lord’s day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	1	10	fa68	figs-simile	φωνὴν μεγάλην ὡς σάλπιγγος	1	loud voice like a trumpet	The **voice** was very **loud** so that the noise sounded **like a trumpet**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a voice as loud as a trumpet being blown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 REV	1	10	ggph	figs-metonymy	φωνὴν μεγάλην	1		Here, **a loud voice** refers to a person speaking loudly, who is later revealed to be Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a sound of someone speaking loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	1	10	fu9q	translate-unknown	ὡς σάλπιγγος	1		A **trumpet** was an instrument for making a loud sound that, in John’s time, was probably made of metal. If you do not have trumpets in your culture, use a word in your language for a loud instrument. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-REV	1	11	y4ab	writing-pronouns	λεγούσης	1		Here, **saying** introduces a quotation. What follows is what the voice of the previous verse said. Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “That voice said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV	1	11	y4ab	writing-quotations	λεγούσης	1		Here, **saying** introduces a quotation. What follows is what the voice of the previous verse said. Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “That voice said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 REV	1	11	kq6x	translate-names	Ἔφεσον…Σμύρναν…Πέργαμον…Θυάτειρα…Σάρδεις…Φιλαδέλφιαν…Λαοδίκιαν	1	Smyrna … Pergamum … Thyatira … Sardis … Philadelphia … Laodicea	These are names of cities in the region of western Asia Minor that are in the modern area of southwestern Turkey today. The logic of the order seems to begin with Ephesus, the most important city at the time and then proceed to move clockwise until it reaches the city that is the furthest south at Laodicea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 REV	1	12	r89l	figs-metonymy	τὴν φωνὴν ἥτις	1	whose voice	Here, **voice** refers figuratively to the person speaking. The context indicates that Jesus Christ is the one speaking here. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	1	12	flem		ἑπτὰ λυχνίας χρυσᾶς	1		Here, **seven golden lampstands** refers to seven poles that each hold one or more oil lamps at the top. These seven lamp holders are made of gold. Apparently these lamp holders represent the seven assemblies of believers in the seven cities mentioned in the previous verse. The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection, so it may be that these seven churches represent Christ’s church as a whole, that is, all believers. Alternate translation: “seven golden stands holding oil lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	1	13	xmx7	figs-simile	ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου	1	son of man	The expression **like a son of man** describes a human figure that recalls the same phrase from [Daniel 7:13](../../dan/07/13.md). The point of this comparison is that the figure John saw looked like a human. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a being that looked like a man” or “a figure that resembled a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	1	12	flem	writing-symlanguage	ἑπτὰ λυχνίας χρυσᾶς	1		Here, **seven golden lampstands** refers to seven poles that each hold one or more oil lamps at the top. These seven lamp holders are made of gold. Apparently these lamp holders represent the seven assemblies of believers in the seven cities mentioned in the previous verse. The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection, so it may be that these seven churches represent Christ’s church as a whole, that is, all believers. Alternate translation: “seven golden stands holding oil lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	1	13	xmx7	figs-simile	ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου	1	son of man	The expression **like a son of man** describes a human figure that recalls the same phrase from [Daniel 7:13](../dan/07/13.md). The point of this comparison is that the figure John saw looked like a human. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a being that looked like a man” or “a figure that resembled a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 REV	1	13	y6qk	translate-unknown	ζώνην χρυσᾶν	1	a golden sash	A **sash** was a strip of cloth worn around the chest. This one had the appearance of gold and may have been woven from golden threads. A **sash** is not a belt that is worn around the waist. Alternate translation: “strap” or “band” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 REV	1	14	hqz1	figs-hendiadys	ἡ δὲ κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ τρίχες	1		Here, the phrase **head and hair** refers to the hair that is on the head. It does not mean that the skin of the head was white. Alternate translation: “the hair on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
 REV	1	14	mg7r	figs-doublet	λευκαὶ, ὡς ἔριον λευκόν ὡς χιών	1		John uses repetition here in order to emphasize how white the hair was. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “extremely white like wool or snow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -89,12 +89,12 @@ REV	1	16	cb26	figs-simile	ὡς ὁ ἥλιος φαίνει ἐν τῇ δυν
 REV	1	17	vz4u	writing-pronouns	καὶ ἔθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1		Here, the subject of **and he placed his right hand on me** should be assumed from earlier in the context at verse [1:13](../01/13.md). Verse [1:13](../01/13.md) mentions one **like a son of man** as a description of Jesus Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could explicitly state the subject as Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus placed his right hand on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
 REV	1	17	jw5r	translate-symaction	καὶ ἔθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ	1	He placed his right hand on me	Here, the phrase **and he placed his right hand on me** signifies a cultural gesture or symbolic action that expresses comfort and assurance for the person who is need of encouragement at the moment of fear. The symbolic action has the accompanying verbal expression of **Do not be afraid** so as to illustrate the significance and symbolism of the cultural gesture. Alternate translation: “and he touched me with his right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 REV	1	17	uc3d	figs-merism	ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος	1	I am the first and the last	Here, **the first and the last** refers to the eternal nature of Jesus because he is God. He existed before anything else and he will continue to exist after everything else is gone. In this expression, **first** refers to what is before everything and **last** refers to what is after everything. This is similar to the use of alpha and omega in [verse 8](../01/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who existed before everything and will exist after everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-REV	1	18	zm05		καὶ ὁ ζῶν καὶ ἐγενόμην νεκρὸς	1		Here, **the one who lives** also refers to the eternal nature of Jesus as God. It could refer to: (1) God possessing eternal life in himself. Alternate translation: “the living one” (2) God being the source of life. Alternate translation: “the one who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV	1	18	zm05	figs-explicit	καὶ ὁ ζῶν καὶ ἐγενόμην νεκρὸς	1		Here, **the one who lives** also refers to the eternal nature of Jesus as God. It could refer to: (1) God possessing eternal life in himself. Alternate translation: “the living one” (2) God being the source of life. Alternate translation: “the one who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	1	18	cc7c	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		Here, **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. See how you translated **behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “know this” or “you must understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	1	18	a4e2	figs-metaphor	ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1	I have the keys of death and of Hades	John uses **keys** here figuratively to refer to authority or power. Just as **keys** have the ability to control the opening or locking of a door, so Jesus has the power to control death and Hades. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have the power over death and over Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	1	18	pgql	figs-explicit	ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1		This clause implies that Jesus can give life to those who have died and let them out of **Hades**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have the power to give life to people who have died and to let them out of Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	1	18	acrx	translate-transliterate	τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου	1		The word **Hades** is the Greek name for the place where the spirits of dead people go. Many Bible translations just use this word as it is, and others translate it, using a word for the place of the dead in their language. The words **death** and **Hades** mean almost the same thing. Through **death** a person enters **Hades**. Alternate translation: “to release people from death, that is, from Hades” or “to free people from death and from the grave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-REV	1	19	eupc	figs-litany	ἃ εἶδες, καὶ ἃ εἰσὶν, καὶ ἃ μέλλει γενέσθαι μετὰ ταῦτα	1		Here, **what you have seen, both the things that are and what must happen after these things** refers to the things that Jesus is showing to John throughout this book. These clauses could indicate (1) events in two time periods, present and future. In this case, the tense of **have seen** is from the perspective of John when he is writing. He cannot write something until he has seen it. Alternate translation: “what you see, that is, the things that exist now, and what must happen afterwards” or (2) events in three time periods, past, present, and future. Alternate translation: “what you have seen, what is, and what must happen afterwards”
+REV	1	19	eupc	figs-litany	ἃ εἶδες, καὶ ἃ εἰσὶν, καὶ ἃ μέλλει γενέσθαι μετὰ ταῦτα	1		Here, **what you have seen, both the things that are and what must happen after these things** refers to the things that Jesus is showing to John throughout this book. These clauses could indicate (1) events in two time periods, present and future. In this case, the tense of **have seen** is from the perspective of John when he is writing. He cannot write something until he has seen it. Alternate translation: “what you see, that is, the things that exist now, and what must happen afterwards” or (2) events in three time periods, past, present, and future. Alternate translation: “what you have seen, what is, and what must happen afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
 REV	1	20	ytmk	figs-explicit	τὸ μυστήριον τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων	1		Here, **the mystery** refers to a secret or symbolic meaning of the vision of the **seven stars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the secret meaning of the seven stars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	1	20	ttic	figs-ellipsis	τὸ μυστήριον τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων, οὓς εἶδες ἐπὶ τῆς δεξιᾶς μου, καὶ τὰς ἑπτὰ λυχνίας τὰς χρυσᾶς	1		This sentence leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “I will explain the mystery of the seven stars that you saw in my right hand, and the seven golden lampstands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
 REV	1	20	fl5d	writing-symlanguage	λυχνίας	1	lampstands	See how you translated this word in [verse 12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ REV	2	10	a9ue	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		See how you translated **Behold** in [
 REV	2	10	agx4	figs-idiom	μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν, ἵνα πειρασθῆτε	1	The devil is about to throw some of you into prison	Here, **to throw** is a idiomatic expression for putting someone into prison or jail. The enemies of the Christians will test them, not God himself. Translators should avoid making the impression to their readers that God is in league with Satan as an author of evil or temptation. Alternate translation: “the devil will soon cause others to put some of you in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 REV	2	10	tlvz	figs-youcrowd	ἐξ ὑμῶν	1		See how you translated the second person pronouns and references in [Revelation 2:2](../02/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
 REV	2	10	snk8	figs-metaphor	ἡμερῶν δέκα	1		Here, **ten days** is probably metaphorical for a short time or limited amount of time for testing. Daniel 1:14 is most likely the source of the expression for a short time of testing. The translator should not avoid, however, rendering the time as a literal length of time of ten days, in contrast to some unspecified amount of time in a metaphorical expression. Alternate translation: “for a short time of testing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	2	10	f5t1	figs-metaphor	γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου	1	Be faithful until death	The use of the word **until** does not mean that you should stop being faithful at death. Rather, the idea is to be faithful even to the point of death. Alternate translation: “Be faithful to me even if they kill you”
+REV	2	10	f5t1	figs-metaphor	γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου	1	Be faithful until death	The use of the word **until** does not mean that you should stop being faithful at death. Rather, the idea is to be faithful even to the point of death. Alternate translation: “Be faithful to me even if they kill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	2	10	zhj8	figs-possession	τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς	1	the crown of life	Here, **the crown of life** refers as a metaphor to the reward of eternal life itself. Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the crown or the wreath as the prize of life itself. Eternal life is the reward in the metaphor of a crown. Alternate translation: “life as your crown” or “life as your wreath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 REV	2	11	g7zq	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one who has an ear, hear	See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	2	11	dc3n	figs-123person	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one … hear	See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -284,11 +284,11 @@ REV	3	8	h90i	figs-idiom	μικρὰν ἔχεις δύναμιν	1		Here, the ph
 REV	3	8	xyw6	figs-idiom	ἐτήρησάς	1	you have obeyed my word	See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 REV	3	8	wsws	figs-possession	μου τὸν λόγον	1		Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the **word** or words that he spoke when he taught the believers in the city of Philadelphia. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the word that I spoke” or “my teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 REV	3	8	b3kz	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	my name	Here, **my name** is a metonym for the person who has that name, which in this case, is Jesus. If your readers would not understand this metonym, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “me” or “the name that I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	3	9	vfkb	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ … ἰδοὺ	1		See how you translated **Behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	3	9	vfkb	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ…ἰδοὺ	1		See how you translated **Behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	3	9	x78m	figs-metaphor	συναγωγῆς τοῦ Σατανᾶ	1	synagogue of Satan	Here, people who gather to obey or to honor **Satan** are spoken of as if they were in a **synagogue**. A **synagogue** is a place of worship and teaching for the Jewish people. See how you translated this same phrase in [Revelation 2:9](../02/09.md). In that verse and its context Jesus also declares there that certain Jewish people were not acting like true Jews as the representative people of God. The translator should retain here in this verse the metaphor and simply define the figure of speech of a **synagogue of Satan** in an explanatory note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	3	9	q496	translate-symaction	προσκυνήσουσιν	1	bow down	Here, to **bow down** in front of a person’s feet represents a sign of submission. Thus, the action of bowing down is not a symbolic gesture that figuratively expresses worship. On the contrary, the gesture of bowing down symbolizes respect or obeisance. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “bow down in submission” or “prostrate themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
 REV	3	9	ah4w	figs-synecdoche	ἐνώπιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	before your feet	Here, **feet** represents the person or the people before whom these individuals from the **synagogue of Satan** bow down. If this figure of speech of synecdoche would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “before you” or “to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-REV	3	10	f9vi	figs-idiom	ἐτήρησας … τηρήσω	1		See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md) for the meaning of the first instance of the word in this verse. However, the second instance of this word in this verse has a special sense of keeping someone safe or protected from something that will cause harm or injury to them. Thus, there is a wordplay between two senses of keeping within this verse in this case here. The translator should attempt to maintain the wordplay in his translation of both instances of the word in this verse, as the UST maintains in this verse and its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV	3	10	f9vi	figs-idiom	ἐτήρησας…τηρήσω	1		See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md) for the meaning of the first instance of the word in this verse. However, the second instance of this word in this verse has a special sense of keeping someone safe or protected from something that will cause harm or injury to them. Thus, there is a wordplay between two senses of keeping within this verse in this case here. The translator should attempt to maintain the wordplay in his translation of both instances of the word in this verse, as the UST maintains in this verse and its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 REV	3	10	k8mb	figs-possession	τὸν λόγον τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου	1		Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the **word** or command that he spoke when he taught the believers in the city of Philadelphia. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the word that I spoke about steadfastness” or “my teaching on steadfastness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
 REV	3	10	y577	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ὑπομονῆς	1		If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **steadfastness**, you can express it with the verb “to endure.” See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:9](../01/09.md) and in [Revelation 2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “to suffer patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 REV	3	10	ql9y	figs-idiom	τῆς ὥρας	1		The translator may wish to explain that **hour** is not sixty minutes. Rather, the **hour** is a moment of time, or a time period, of testing. If this idiom is not clear in your language, then you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time” or “the moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -296,13 +296,13 @@ REV	3	10	gv5g	figs-possession	τῆς ὥρας τοῦ πειρασμοῦ	1	I
 REV	3	10	e6bw	figs-metaphor	τῆς μελλούσης ἔρχεσθαι	1	is coming	Here, **to come** describes future being or existence. If your readers would not understand what it means for future existence **to come**, then you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “that will occur” or “that is about to be” or “that is about to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	3	11	ih12	figs-explicit	ἔρχομαι ταχύ	1	I am coming soon	Here, **coming quickly** implies an arrival of Jesus to judge. It is understood that Jesus is **coming** in order to judge. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the implicit meaning in an explicit way. Alternate translation: “I am coming to judge quickly” or “I am coming to judge soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	3	11	n9a9	figs-idiom	κράτει ὃ ἔχεις	1	Hold to what you have	See how you translated the verb to **Hold fast to** in [Revelation 2:13](../02/13.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV	3	11	a4m5	figs-metaphor	τὸν στέφανόν	1	crown	Here, **crown** stands for a reward. See how you translated “victory prize” in [Revelation 2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	3	11	a4m5	figs-metaphor	τὸν στέφανόν	1	crown	Here, **crown** stands for a reward or a victory prize. See how you translated **crown** in [Revelation 2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	3	12	px36	figs-genericnoun	ὁ νικῶν	1	The one who conquers, I will make a pillar in the temple of my God	See how you translated this generic noun phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). For the metaphorical expression **one who conquers** that occurs often in chapters two and three of the book of Revelation (see Revelation 2:7, 11, 17, 26; 3:5, 12, 21), please see the explanatory note for this generic noun phrase **one who conquers** in the chapter two introduction. Alternate translation: “anyone who conquers” or “all who conquer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-REV	3	12	xiwx	figs-metaphor	ποιήσω αὐτὸν στῦλον ἐν τῷ ναῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ μου	1		The **pillar** represents an important and permanent part of God’s kingdom. Alternate translation: “I will make him strong, like a pillar in the temple of my God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	3	12	xiwx	figs-metaphor	ποιήσω αὐτὸν στῦλον ἐν τῷ ναῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ μου	1		Jesus is speaking of victorious believers as if they were a **pillar** in the temple of God. Here, a **pillar** represents an important and permanent part of God’s kingdom. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will make him strong, like a pillar in the temple of my God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	3	13	u5jk	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one who has an ear, hear	See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	3	13	ug5m	figs-123person	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one … hear	See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 REV	3	13	cm7r	figs-idiom	τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Here, **the Spirit** most likely refers to God’s Spirit, or simply the Holy Spirit of God’s triune nature, in contrast to the spirit of the writer or author which one finds in [Revelation 1:10](../01/10.md). In other words, the Holy Spirit addresses the messages and contents of each letter written to each of the seven churches which are addressed in chapters two and three (see Revelation 2:7, 11, 17, 29: 3:6, 13, 22). See the chapter introductions for chapter two and for chapter three to read this same same explanatory note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV	3	14	r6bz	translate-names	καὶ τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν Φιλαδελφίᾳ ἐκκλησίας γράψον	1	General Information:	This is the beginning of the message to the angel of the church in **Laodicea**. **Laodicea** is the name of one of the seven churches, or seven assemblies of believers, which existed in southwestern Asia Minor when John wrote the book of Revelation. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+REV	3	14	r6bz	translate-names	καὶ τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ ἐκκλησίας γράψον	1	General Information:	This is the beginning of the message to the angel of the church in **Laodicea**. **Laodicea** is the name of one of the seven churches, or seven assemblies of believers, which existed in southwestern Asia Minor when John wrote the book of Revelation. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
 REV	3	14	jg3b	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀγγέλῳ	1	the angel	See how you translated **angel** in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	3	14	wzg9	writing-quotations	τάδε λέγει	1	Laodicea	See how you translated the phrase **says these things** in [Revelation 2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
 REV	3	14	f65v		ὁ Ἀμήν	1	the Amen	Here, **The Amen** is a name for Jesus Christ. He guarantees God’s promises by saying amen to them.
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ REV	3	21	un17	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρός μου	1	my Fat
 REV	3	22	m13x	figs-metonymy	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one who has an ear, hear	See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	3	22	mjv6	figs-123person	ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω	1	Let the one … hear	See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
 REV	3	22	vnr6	figs-idiom	τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Here, **the Spirit** most likely refers to God’s Spirit, or simply the Holy Spirit of God’s triune nature, in contrast to the spirit of the writer or author which one finds in [Revelation 1:10](../01/10.md). In other words, the Holy Spirit addresses the messages and contents of each letter written to each of the seven churches which are addressed in chapters two and three (see Revelation 2:7, 11, 17, 29: 3:6, 13, 22). See the chapter introductions for chapter two and for chapter three to read this same same explanatory note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV	4	intro	cl9f			0		# Revelation 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.<br><br>John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald<br><br>These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.<br><br>### Twenty-four elders<br><br>Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### Seven spirits of God<br><br>These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).<br><br>### Giving glory to God<br><br>God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Difficult images<br><br>Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV	4	intro	cl9f			0		# Revelation 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.<br><br>John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald<br><br>These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.<br><br>### Twenty-four elders<br><br>Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### Seven spirits of God<br><br>These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).<br><br>### Giving glory to God<br><br>God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Difficult images<br><br>Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
 REV	4	1	ws2q			0	General Information:	John begins to describe his vision of the throne of God.
 REV	4	1	vh4i		μετὰ ταῦτα	1	After these things	See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:1-3:22](../02/01.md) Alternate translation: “After I had just seen these things”
 REV	4	1	suqj	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1		See how you translated **behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). Here, it is more natural to avoid the usual “pay attention” in the UST. The translator should probably be less literal in the translation here of **behold** due to the unique context (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ REV	4	10	sly8	translate-symaction	βαλοῦσιν τοὺς στεφάνους
 REV	4	10	wvf9		βαλοῦσιν	1	lay	This could refers to: (1) placing something. (2) throwing down forcibly, as of something worthless ([Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully.
 REV	4	11	idj1		ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	our Lord and our God	Here, **our Lord and God** is one person, the one who was sitting on the throne.
 REV	4	11	q91l	figs-metonymy	λαβεῖν τὴν δόξαν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν	1	to receive the glory and the honor and the power	Here, **the glory and the honor and the power** are things that God always has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. Alternate translation: “to be praised for your glory, honor, and power” or “for everyone to praise you because you are glorious, honorable, and powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	5	intro	g7ey			0		# Revelation 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sealed scroll<br><br>Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])<br><br>### Twenty-four elders<br><br>Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### Christian prayers<br><br>The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.<br><br>### Seven spirits of God<br><br>These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	5	intro	g7ey			0		# Revelation 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Sealed scroll<br><br>Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])<br><br>### Twenty-four elders<br><br>Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### Christian prayers<br><br>The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.<br><br>### Seven spirits of God<br><br>These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	5	1	txr5			0	Connecting Statement:	John continues to describe what he saw in his vision of the throne of God.
 REV	5	1	w3yi		καὶ εἶδον	1	Then I saw	Alternate translation: “After I saw those things, I saw”
 REV	5	1	u3br		τοῦ καθημένου ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου	1	the one who was seated on the throne	This is the same **one** as in [Revelation 4:2-3](../04/02.md).
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ REV	5	9	voro		ἄξιος	1		See how you translated **worthy** in [Revelation 4:
 REV	5	9	yu7h	figs-activepassive	ἐσφάγης	1	For you were slaughtered	Here, **you were slaughtered** is a passive verbal phrase that can be turned into an active verbal expression. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they slaughtered you” or “people killed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 REV	5	9	qtv5	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου	1	with your blood	Here, **blood** is a metonym that substitutes for blood. The phrase **with your blood** can mean “by your death” or “by dying.” Since **blood** represents a person’s life, losing the blood represents a death or the act of dying. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with your death” or “with your act of dying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	5	9	zzc7	figs-litany	ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς, καὶ γλώσσης, καὶ λαοῦ, καὶ ἔθνους	1	from every tribe, language, people, and nation	The clause **from every tribe and tongue and people and nation** represents a litany. The list in this litany represents all **people** of the earth and includes every ethnic group that the world contains. Use words in your language that someone would use to include all types of people, races, and ethnic groups which inhabit the world. Alternate translation: “from every ethnic group and tongue and people and nation” or “from every tribe and tongue and race and nation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
-REV	5	10	wn87		βασιλείαν καὶ ἱερεῖς	1		See how you translated **kingdom** and **priests** in [Revelation 1:06](../01/06.md).
+REV	5	10	wn87		βασιλείαν καὶ ἱερεῖς	1		See how you translated **kingdom** and **priests** in [Revelation 1:6](../01/06.md).
 REV	5	11	xuy1	translate-numbers	μυριάδες μυριάδων καὶ χιλιάδες χιλιάδων	1	ten thousands of ten thousands and thousands of thousands	Here, **myriads** and **thousands** refer to numbers that represent so many in their number that people cannot count them. The numbers **myriads** and **thousands** simply mean numbers that are so great that they are countless. If people will not understand these numbers in your target language, then you can simply use natural expressions in your language for numbers that are so great that one cannot count them. Use expressions in your language that show huge numbers that are difficult to count. Alternate translation: “millions” or “too many thousands to count” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 REV	5	12	m6hy		ἄξιόν	1		See how you translated **Worthy** in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md).
 REV	5	12	xzbc	writing-symlanguage	τὸ Ἀρνίον	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -400,48 +400,52 @@ REV	5	12	gnv1	figs-activepassive	λαβεῖν	1	Worthy is the Lamb who has been
 REV	5	12	w0dv	figs-abstractnouns	λαβεῖν τὴν δύναμιν, καὶ πλοῦτον, καὶ σοφίαν, καὶ ἰσχὺν, καὶ τιμὴν, καὶ δόξαν, καὶ εὐλογίαν	1		If your readers would misunderstand these abstract nouns, you can express them as verbs. See how you translated a similar sentence in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “for everyone to honor, glorify, and praise him because he is powerful, wealthy, wise, and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 REV	5	13	sad6	figs-merism	ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὑποκάτω τῆς γῆς	1	in heaven and on the earth and under the earth	Here, the entire clause and all of its descriptions of parts of the cosmos or universe represent a merism. Essentially, the entire clause means everywhere. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 REV	5	13	l2sn	writing-symlanguage	τῷ Ἀρνίῳ	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	5	14	j2f3		ἀμήν!	1		See how you translated **Amen** in [Revelation 1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	6	intro	zkn7			0		# Revelation 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven Seals<br><br>Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### The Four Horsemen<br><br>As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Lamb<br><br>This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Similes<br><br>In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	5	14	j2f3	writing-symlanguage	ἀμήν!	1		See how you translated **Amen** in [Revelation 1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV	6	intro	zkn7			0		# Revelation 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven Seals<br><br>Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### The Four Horsemen<br><br>As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Lamb<br><br>This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Similes<br><br>In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 REV	6	1	q571	writing-symlanguage	τὸ Ἀρνίον	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV	6	1	g13d	translate-ordinal	μίαν ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the initial of the seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	1	g13d	translate-ordinal	μίαν ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ	1		If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the initial of the seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 REV	6	1	i392	translate-unknown	τῶν ἑπτὰ σφραγίδων	1	Connecting Statement:	See how you translated **seven seals** in [Revelation 5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 REV	6	1	v9td	figs-simile	ὡς φωνῇ βροντῆς	1		Here, **one of the living creatures** speaks with a very loud voice. John is using **thunder** figuratively in a simile to mean a very loud noise for the voice. Alternate translation: “as with a noise of thunder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	6	2	t2qg	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος	1	he was given a crown	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he received a crown” or “God gave him a crown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	6	3	bs66	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν δευτέραν	1	the second seal	The word **second** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	3	i1p4	translate-ordinal	τοῦ δευτέρου ζῴου	1	the second living creature	The word **second** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next living creature” or “living creature number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	4	qg8s		ἐξῆλθεν…πυρρός	1	came out—fiery red	This can the stated as a second sentence. Alternate translation: “came out. It was red like fire” or “came out. It was bright red”
-REV	6	4	w57m	figs-activepassive	τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπ’ αὐτὸν, ἐδόθη αὐτῷ	1	To its rider was given permission	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God gave permission to its rider” or “its rider received permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	6	4	je64	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη αὐτῷ μάχαιρα μεγάλη	1	This rider was given a huge sword	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this rider received a huge sword” or “God gave this rider a huge sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	6	5	v4us	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τρίτην	1	the third seal	The word **third** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	5	zec1	translate-ordinal	τοῦ τρίτου ζῴου	1	the third living creature	The word **third** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next living creature” or “living creature number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	5	rm4y		ζυγὸν	1	a pair of scales	A **scales** is a tool used for weighing things.
-REV	6	6	b5rr	translate-bvolume	χοῖνιξ σίτου…τρεῖς χοίνικες κριθῶν	1	A choenix of wheat … three choenices of barley	A **choenix** was a specific measure that was about one liter. The plural of **choenix** is “choenices.” Alternate translation: “one liter of wheat … three liters of barley” or “one bowl of wheat … three bowls of barley” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+REV	6	2	t2qg	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος	1	he was given a crown	Here, **to him was given a crown** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he received a crown” or “God gave him a crown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	3	bs66	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν δευτέραν	1	the second seal	The word **second** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	3	i1p4	translate-ordinal	τοῦ δευτέρου ζῴου	1	the second living creature	The word **second** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another living creature” or “the next living creature” or “living creature number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	4	w57m	figs-activepassive	τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπ’ αὐτὸν, ἐδόθη αὐτῷ	1	To its rider was given permission	Here, **to the one sitting on it was granted to him** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave permission to its rider” or “its rider received permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	4	je64	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη αὐτῷ μάχαιρα μεγάλη	1	This rider was given a huge sword	Here, **to him was given a huge sword** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this rider received a huge sword” or “God gave this rider a huge sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	5	v4us	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τρίτην	1	the third seal	The word **third** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	5	zec1	translate-ordinal	τοῦ τρίτου ζῴου	1	the third living creature	The word **third** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another living creature” or “the next living creature” or “living creature number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	5	rm4y	translate-unknown	ζυγὸν	1	a pair of scales	Here, **a pair of scales** is a tool that people utilize to weigh scarce food. Most likely **a pair of scales** was a weighing device which included two round plates or bowls hanging by ropes to a pole which the rider holds in his hand. Translators should maintain the imagery of the ancient tool and not describe modern systems for weighing things. Alternate translation: “a pair of balances” or “a pair of weights” or “balancing scales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV	6	6	b5rr	translate-bvolume	χοῖνιξ σίτου…τρεῖς χοίνικες κριθῶν	1	A choenix of wheat … three choenices of barley	A **choenix** was a specific measure that was about one liter. The plural of **choenix** is “choenices.” Alternate translation: “one quart of wheat … three quarts of barley” or “one bowl of wheat … three bowls of barley” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
 REV	6	6	v3sn	translate-bmoney	δηναρίου…δηναρίου	1	one denarius	The **denarius** was a coin that was worth a day’s wages. A denarius was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “one silver coin” or “the pay for one day of work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
-REV	6	6	ej1v		καὶ τὸ ἔλαιον καὶ τὸν οἶνον μὴ ἀδικήσῃς	1	But do not harm the oil and the wine	If the **oil and wine** were harmed, there would be less of them for people to buy, and their prices would go up.
-REV	6	6	c5ik	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔλαιον καὶ τὸν οἶνον	1	the oil and the wine	The **oil** and the **wine** probably stand for the olive oil harvest and the grape harvest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	6	7	mu5f	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τετάρτην	1	the fourth seal	The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	7	zj87	translate-ordinal	τοῦ τετάρτου ζῴου	1	the fourth living creature	The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next living creature” or “living creature number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	8	e11y		ἵππος χλωρός	1	pale horse	Here, **pale** is the color of a dead body, so its color is a symbol of death. Alternate translation: “a grey horse”
-REV	6	8	df32	figs-metonymy	τὸ τέταρτον τῆς γῆς	1	one-fourth of the earth	Here, **the earth** represents the people of the earth. Alternate translation: “one-fourth of the people on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	6	8	aj1h	translate-fraction	τὸ τέταρτον τῆς γῆς	1		Alternate translation: “one out of every four of the people on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
-REV	6	8	tjw8	figs-metonymy	ῥομφαίᾳ	1	the sword	Here, **the sword** represents war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	6	8	n9x3		ὑπὸ τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς	1	with the wild animals of the earth	This means that Death and Hades would cause **the wild animals** to attack and kill people.
-REV	6	9	bv8r	translate-ordinal	τὴν πέμπτην σφραγῖδα	1	the fifth seal	The word **fifth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number five” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	9	n3mi		ὑποκάτω τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου	1	under the altar	This may have been “at the base of the altar.”
-REV	6	9	b2kp	figs-activepassive	τῶν ἐσφαγμένων	1	those who had been killed	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom others had killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	6	9	y8c6	figs-metonymy	διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον	1	because of the word of God and the testimony which they held	Here, **the word of God** is a metonym for the message from God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	6	9	x1yr	figs-metaphor	διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον	1		Here, **held** is a metaphor. Here, holding **the testimony** could refer to: (1) believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the teachings of scripture and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	6	10	qz1i	figs-metonymy	ἐκδικεῖς τὸ αἷμα ἡμῶν	1	avenge our blood	Here, **blood** represents their deaths. Alternate translation: “punish those who killed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	6	11	bq1p	figs-activepassive	ἕως πληρωθῶσιν καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν, οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποκτέννεσθαι ὡς καὶ αὐτοί	1	until the full number of their fellow servants and their brothers was reached who were to be killed, just as they had been killed	This implies that God had decided that a certain number of people should **be killed** by their enemies. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until people had killed the full number of their fellow servants and brothers that they were going to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	6	11	q9xh		καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν	1	their fellow servants and their brothers	This is one group of people described in two ways: as **fellow servants** and as **brothers**. Alternate translation: “their brothers who serve God with them” or “their fellow believers who serve God with them”
-REV	6	11	p615	figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	Christians are often spoken of as being one another’s **brothers**. Females were among those spoken of here. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV	6	12	z9qm	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἕκτην	1	the sixth seal	The word **sixth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV	6	12	xu8l	figs-simile	μέλας ὡς σάκκος	1	as black as sackcloth	Sometimes **sackcloth** was made of black hair. People would wear sackcloth when they were mourning. The image of sackcloth is meant to lead people to think of death and mourning. Alternate translation: “as black as mourning clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	6	12	g7rt	figs-simile	ὡς αἷμα	1	like blood	The image of **blood** is meant to lead people to think of death. If your readers would misunderstand this simile, you can state how it was like blood. Alternate translation: “red like blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	6	13	s137	figs-activepassive	ὡς συκῆ βάλλει τοὺς ὀλύνθους αὐτῆς, ὑπὸ ἀνέμου μεγάλου σειομένη	1	just as a fig tree drops its unripe fruit when shaken by a stormy wind	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as a stormy wind shakes a fig tree and causes it to drop its unripe fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	6	c5ik	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔλαιον καὶ τὸν οἶνον	1	the oil and the wine	The **oil** and the **wine** probably stand for the olive oil harvest and the grape harvest. In other words, **the oil and the wine** figuratively represent olive oil and grape harvest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “the olive and the grape” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	6	7	mu5f	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τετάρτην	1	the fourth seal	The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	7	zj87	translate-ordinal	τοῦ τετάρτου ζῴου	1	the fourth living creature	The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another living creature” or “the next living creature” or “living creature number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	8	t7y4	translate-transliterate	ὁ Θάνατος, καὶ ὁ ᾍδης	1		See how you translated **Death** and **Hades** in [Revelation 1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+REV	6	8	qlly	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἐξουσία	1		Here, **authority was given to them** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave the authority to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	8	aj1h	translate-fraction	τὸ τέταρτον τῆς γῆς	1		Here, **one-fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. Alternate translation: “one out of every four of the people of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+REV	6	8	df32	figs-metonymy	τῆς γῆς	1	one-fourth of the earth	Here, **the earth** represents the people of the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one-fourth of the people on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	6	8	tjw8	figs-metonymy	ῥομφαίᾳ	1	the sword	Here, **sword** represents war. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “war” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	6	9	bv8r	translate-ordinal	τὴν πέμπτην σφραγῖδα	1	the fifth seal	The word **fifth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number five” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	9	b2kp	figs-activepassive	τῶν ἐσφαγμένων	1	those who had been killed	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those whom others had killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	9	x1yr	figs-metaphor	διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον	1		Here, **held** is a metaphor. Here, holding **the testimony** could refer to: (1) believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the scriptures and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	6	9	tqdd		τὴν μαρτυρίαν	1		See how you translated **the testimony** in [Revelation 1:2](../01/02.md).
+REV	6	10	qz1i	figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα ἡμῶν	1	avenge our blood	Here, **blood** represents the deaths of these believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “those who killed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV	6	11	x3a9	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἑκάστῳ στολὴ λευκή	1		Here, **to each of them was given a white robe** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave to each of them a white robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	11	jppt	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἐρρέθη αὐτοῖς	1		Here, **and they were told** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	11	bq1p	figs-activepassive	ἕως πληρωθῶσιν καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν, οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποκτέννεσθαι ὡς καὶ αὐτοί	1	until the full number of their fellow servants and their brothers was reached who were to be killed, just as they had been killed	This entire clause implies that God had decided that a certain number of people should **be killed** by their enemies. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until people had killed the full number of their fellow servants and brothers that they were going to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	11	p615	figs-metaphor	οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	Here, **brothers** mean “fellow believers in Jesus.” Christians are often spoken of as being one another’s **brothers**. Females were among those spoken of here. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	6	12	z9qm	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἕκτην	1	the sixth seal	The word **sixth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV	6	12	g9dm	translate-unknown	σεισμὸς μέγας	1		Here, **a great earthquake** is a natural disaster in which the ground shakes from geological movement. Your language and culture may have a term for an **earthquake** that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term **earthquake**, as UST does. Alternate translation: “a great shaking of the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV	6	12	xu8l	figs-simile	μέλας ὡς σάκκος	1	as black as sackcloth	Here, **sackcloth** is clothing for mourning that is made from black hair. People would wear **sackcloth** when they were mourning. The image of **sackcloth** is meant to lead people to think of death and mourning just like the color of black also evokes imagery of death and mourning. If your readers would misunderstand this simile, you can explain that **sackcloth** is clothing made for mourning explicitly. Alternate translation: “black as mourning clothing” or “dark like sackcloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	6	12	g7rt	figs-simile	ὡς αἷμα	1	like blood	Here, the moon is like **blood** because the color of the moon changes to a dark red color. If your readers would misunderstand this simile, you can state how the moon is like blood explicitly. Alternate translation: “red like blood” or “as red as blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	6	13	s137	figs-activepassive	ὡς συκῆ βάλλει τοὺς ὀλύνθους αὐτῆς, ὑπὸ ἀνέμου μεγάλου σειομένη	1	just as a fig tree drops its unripe fruit when shaken by a stormy wind	If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “just as a stormy wind shakes a fig tree and causes it to drop its unripe fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	13	lkff	figs-simile	ὡς συκῆ βάλλει τοὺς ὀλύνθους αὐτῆς	1		Here, the stars in the sky fall like immature figs fall from a fig tree during a storm. If your readers would misunderstand this simile with figs, you do not need to state explicitly that the falling fruits are figs. Alternate translation: “like a fruit tree drops its unripe fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 REV	6	14	jyb7	figs-simile	ὁ οὐρανὸς ἀπεχωρίσθη ὡς βιβλίον ἑλισσόμενον	1	The sky vanished like a scroll that was being rolled up	The **sky** was normally thought of as being strong like a sheet of metal, but now it was weak like a sheet of paper and easily torn and **rolled up**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV	6	15	m6j6		οἱ χιλίαρχοι	1	the generals	Here, **the generals** refers to the warriors who command in the battle.
-REV	6	15	vl6h		τὰ σπήλαια	1	the caves	These **caves** are large holes in the sides of hills.
+REV	6	14	xzn5	figs-activepassive	ὁ οὐρανὸς ἀπεχωρίσθη	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky split open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	14	gl0m	figs-activepassive	ὡς βιβλίον ἑλισσόμενον	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as a scroll folds up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	14	ic4p	figs-activepassive	πᾶν ὄρος καὶ νῆσος ἐκ τῶν τόπων αὐτῶν ἐκινήθησαν	1		If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “every mountain and island shifted from its place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV	6	15	m6j6	translate-unknown	οἱ χιλίαρχοι	1	the generals	Here, **the generals** refers to military officers or warriors who command in the battle. Alternate translation: “the war leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV	6	15	n984	figs-merism	οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς, καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνες, καὶ οἱ χιλίαρχοι, καὶ οἱ πλούσιοι, καὶ οἱ ἰσχυροὶ, καὶ πᾶς δοῦλος καὶ ἐλεύθερος	1		Here, all the nouns in the series or list refers to every type of person and people. The various examples refer to all kinds of people who exist in the world. The merism names various kinds or parts of society by stating the extreme ends of the society. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all types of people, whether rich, poor, powerful, or weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+REV	6	15	vl6h	translate-unknown	τὰ σπήλαια	1	the caves	These **caves** are large holes in the sides of hills. If your readers would not be familiar with **caves**, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the holes in the rocks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
 REV	6	16	f4bj	figs-metonymy	προσώπου τοῦ	1	the face of the one	Here, **face** represents “presence.” Alternate translation: “the presence of the one” or “the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	6	16	g0ed	writing-symlanguage	τοῦ Ἀρνίου	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	6	17	bd8v	figs-metonymy	ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτῶν	1	the great day of their wrath has come	The **great day of their wrath** refers to the time when they would punish wicked people. Alternate translation: “this is the terrible time when they will punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -449,19 +453,18 @@ REV	6	17	i7t4	figs-metaphor	ἦλθεν	1	has come	Existing now is spoken of as
 REV	6	17	cq9e		ὀργῆς αὐτῶν	1	their wrath	Here, **their** refers to the one on the throne and the Lamb.
 REV	6	17	r1ta	figs-metonymy	τίς δύναται σταθῆναι?	1	Who is able to stand?	Surviving, or staying alive, is spoken of as standing. Alternate translation: “Who can survive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	6	17	pmn6	figs-rquestion	τίς δύναται σταθῆναι?	1		This question is used to express their great sadness and fear that no one will be able to survive when God punishes them. Alternate translation: “no one can survive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-REV	7	intro	f27i			0		# Revelation 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.<br><br>Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Worship<br><br>God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Lamb<br><br>This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV	7	intro	f27i			0		# Revelation 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.<br><br>Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Worship<br><br>God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### The Lamb<br><br>This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
 REV	7	1	b1yl			0	General Information:	John begins to describe a vision of 144,000 servants of God who become marked with seals. Their marking takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal.
 REV	7	1	id3y		τὰς τέσσαρας γωνίας τῆς γῆς	1	the four corners of the earth	The **earth** is spoken of as if it were flat and square like a sheet of paper. The phrase **the four corners** refers to the north, south, east, and west.
 REV	7	2	sgq7	figs-metonymy	σφραγῖδα	1	the seal of the living God	Here, **the seal** refers to a tool that is used to press a mark onto a wax seal. In this case the tool would be used to put a mark on God’s people. Alternate translation: “the marker” or “stamp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	7	3	upb7	figs-metonymy	σφραγίσωμεν τοὺς δούλους τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν ἐπὶ τῶν μετώπων αὐτῶν	1	have sealed … on their foreheads	Here, to **seal** refers to placing a mark on something. This mark shows that the people belong to God and that he will protect them. Alternate translation: “we put a mark on the foreheads of the servants of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	7	3	je8m		μετώπων	1	foreheads	The **forehead** is the top of the face, above the eyes.
 REV	7	4	m58v	figs-activepassive	τῶν ἐσφραγισμένων	1	those who were sealed	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God’s angel marked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	7	4	lh7h	figs-ellipsis	ἑκατὸν τεσσεράκοντα τέσσαρες χιλιάδες	1	144000	Alternate translation: “one hundred forty-four thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-REV	7	5	lyz8	figs-ellipsis	δώδεκα χιλιάδες	1	twelve thousand from the tribe	Alternate translation: “12,000 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+REV	7	4	lh7h	translate-numbers	ἑκατὸν τεσσεράκοντα τέσσαρες χιλιάδες	1	144000	Alternate translation: “one hundred forty-four thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+REV	7	5	lyz8	translate-numbers	δώδεκα χιλιάδες	1	twelve thousand from the tribe	Alternate translation: “twelve thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 REV	7	9	cj5k			0	General Information:	John begins to describe a second vision about a multitude praising God. This vision also takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal.
-REV	7	9	ioxw	writing-symlanguage	τοῦ Ἀρνίου	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	7	9	au1m		ὄχλος πολύς	1	a huge multitude	Alternate translation: “a huge crowd” or “a great number of people”
-REV	7	9	v63z		στολὰς λευκάς	1	white robes	Here the color **white** represents purity.
+REV	7	9	ioxw	writing-symlanguage	τοῦ Ἀρνίου	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	7	10	m5az		ἡ σωτηρία τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν	1	Salvation belongs to	Alternate translation: “Salvation comes from our God”
 REV	7	10	vlv1	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ σωτηρία τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν, τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ θρόνῳ καὶ τῷ Ἀρνίῳ	1	Salvation belongs … to the Lamb	They were praising **God** and **the Lamb**. If your readers would misunderstand the abstract **Salvation**, you can express it with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “Our God, who sits on the throne, and the Lamb have saved us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 REV	7	10	e31m	writing-symlanguage	τῷ Ἀρνίῳ	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -477,7 +480,7 @@ REV	7	14	b7mi	figs-metaphor	ἔπλυναν τὰς στολὰς αὐτῶν,
 REV	7	14	ym21	figs-metonymy	τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Ἀρνίου	1	the blood of the Lamb	Here, **blood** is used to refer to the death of Lamb. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	7	14	xl4x	writing-symlanguage	τοῦ Ἀρνίου	1		Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	7	15	qs23		εἰσιν…αὐτούς	1	they … them	Here, **they** and **them** refer to those people who have come out of the great tribulation.
-REV	7	15	us3i	figs-merism	ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτὸς	1	day and night	Here, **day** and **night** are used together to mean “all the time” or “without stopping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+REV	7	15	us3i	figs-merism	ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτὸς	1	day and night	Here, **day** and **night** are used together to mean “all the time” or “without stopping”. Alernate translation: “continually” or “always” or “unendingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
 REV	7	15	k9f2	figs-metaphor	σκηνώσει ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	will spread his tent over them	Protecting them is spoken of as if he were giving them shelter to live under. Alternate translation: “will shelter them” or “will protect them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	7	16	p6u7		οὐ πεινάσουσιν…αὐτοὺς	1	They … them	Here, **They** and **them** refer to those people who have come out of the great tribulation.
 REV	7	16	t45h	figs-metaphor	οὐδὲ μὴ πέσῃ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ὁ ἥλιος	1	The sun will not beat down	The heat of the **sun** is compared to punishment that causes people to suffer. Alternate translation: “and the sun will not burn them” or “and the sun will not make them weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -487,7 +490,7 @@ REV	7	17	wc49		αὐτούς…αὐτοὺς	1	their … them	Both occurrences
 REV	7	17	bi5i	figs-metaphor	ὅτι τὸ Ἀρνίον…ποιμανεῖ αὐτούς	1	For the Lamb … will be their shepherd	The elder speaks of the Lamb’s care for his people as if it were a shepherd’s care for his sheep. Alternate translation: “for the Lamb … will be like a shepherd to them” or “for the Lamb … will care for them as a shepherd cares for his sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	7	17	m6m8	figs-metaphor	ὁδηγήσει αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ ζωῆς πηγὰς ὑδάτων	1	he will guide them to springs of living water	The elder speaks of what gives life as if it were **springs** of fresh **water**. Alternate translation: “he will guide them like a shepherd guiding his sheep to fresh water” or “he will guide them to life like a shepherd guiding his sheep to living water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	7	17	g3d2	figs-metonymy	ἐξαλείψει ὁ Θεὸς πᾶν δάκρυον ἐκ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	God will wipe away every tear from their eyes	Here, a **tear** represents sadness. Alternate translation: “God will wipe away their sadness, like wiping away tears” or “God will cause them to not be sad anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	8	intro	ma7f			0		# Revelation 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven seals and seven trumpets<br><br>This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Passive voice<br><br>John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])<br><br>### Similes<br><br>In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	8	intro	ma7f			0		# Revelation 8 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven seals and seven trumpets<br><br>This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Passive voice<br><br>John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])<br><br>### Similes<br><br>In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 REV	8	1	d652			0	Connecting Statement:	The Lamb opens the seventh seal.
 REV	8	1	mh2b	translate-ordinal	τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἑβδόμην	1	the seventh seal	This is the last of the seven seals on the scroll. The word **seventh** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “the final seal” or “seal number seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
 REV	8	2	fri9	figs-activepassive	ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες	1	seven trumpets were given to them	Each of the seven angels were given one trumpet. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God gave them seven trumpets. (2) the Lamb gave them seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -511,7 +514,7 @@ REV	8	12	dfm7	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλ
 REV	8	12	ukh6		σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν	1	a third of them turned dark	The phrase **a third of then turned dark** could mean: (1) one third of the time, they were dark. (2) one third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark.
 REV	8	12	t1ag		ἡ ἡμέρα μὴ φάνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, καὶ ἡ νὺξ ὁμοίως	1	a third of the day and a third of the night had no light	Alternate translation: “there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night” or “they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night”
 REV	8	13	x375	figs-activepassive	ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν φωνῶν τῆς σάλπιγγος τῶν τριῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν μελλόντων σαλπίζειν	1	because of the remaining trumpet … angels	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV	9	intro	sq5c			0		# Revelation 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### Woe<br><br>John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Animal imagery<br><br>This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.<br><br>### Bottomless pit<br><br>This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])<br><br>### Abaddon and Apollyon<br><br>“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])<br><br>### Repentance<br><br>Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Simile<br><br>John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	9	intro	sq5c			0		# Revelation 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### Woe<br><br>John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Animal imagery<br><br>This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.<br><br>### Bottomless pit<br><br>This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])<br><br>### Abaddon and Apollyon<br><br>“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])<br><br>### Repentance<br><br>Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Simile<br><br>John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 REV	9	1	d26c			0	Connecting Statement:	The fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet.
 REV	9	1	jim6		εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα	1	I saw a star from heaven that had fallen	John saw the **star** after it **had fallen**. He did not watch if fall.
 REV	9	1	v12j		ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου	1	the key to the shaft of the bottomless pit	Alternate translation: “the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit”
@@ -549,13 +552,13 @@ REV	9	15	ijx2	figs-activepassive	ἐλύθησαν οἱ τέσσαρες ἄγ
 REV	9	15	p3w1	figs-activepassive	οἱ τέσσαρες ἄγγελοι, οἱ ἡτοιμασμένοι	1	The four angels who had been prepared	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the four angels whom God had prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 REV	9	15	b3d6	figs-parallelism	εἰς τὴν ὥραν, καὶ ἡμέραν, καὶ μῆνα, καὶ ἐνιαυτόν	1	for that hour, that day, that month, and that year	These words are used to show that there is a specific, chosen time and not just any time. Alternate translation: “for that exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
 REV	9	16	h8uf			0	General Information:	Suddenly, a huge number of soldiers on horseback appear in John’s vision. John is no longer speaking about the four angels mentioned in the previous verse.
-REV	9	16	ays5	translate-numbers	δύο μυριάδες μυριάδων	1	200000000	Some ways to express **two myriads** are: “two hundred million” or “two hundred thousand thousand” or “twenty thousand times ten thousand.” If your language does not have a specific number for this, you could also see how you translated a similar large number in [Revelation 5:11](../05/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+REV	9	16	ays5	translate-numbers	δύο μυριάδες μυριάδων	1	200,000,000	Some ways to express **two myriads** are: “two hundred million” or “two hundred thousand thousand” or “twenty thousand times ten thousand.” If your language does not have a specific number for this, you could also see how you translated a similar large number in [Revelation 5:11](../05/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 REV	9	17	j5n9		πυρίνους	1	fiery red	See how you translated this in [Revelation 6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “red like fire” or “bright red”
 REV	9	17	pqe8		θειώδεις	1	sulfurous yellow	Alternate translation: “yellow like sulfur” or “bright yellow like sulfur”
 REV	9	18	x4fr	translate-fraction	τὸ τρίτον τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	A third of the people	See how you translated “A third” in [Revelation 8:7](../08/07.md). Alternate translation: “One third of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
 REV	9	20	xf3t	figs-activepassive	οἳ οὐκ ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς ταύταις	1	those who were not killed by these plagues	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom the plagues had not killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 REV	9	20	d3vn	figs-distinguish	ἃ οὔτε βλέπειν δύνανται, οὔτε ἀκούειν, οὔτε περιπατεῖν	1	things that cannot see, hear, or walk	This phrase reminds us that idols are not alive and do not deserve to be worshiped. But the people did not stop worshiping them. Alternate translation: “even though these idols cannot see, hear, or walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-REV	10	intro	ys3l			0		# Revelation 10 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven thunders<br><br>John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for “thunder” when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### “The mystery of God”<br><br>This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Simile<br><br>John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV	10	intro	ys3l			0		# Revelation 10 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Seven thunders<br><br>John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for “thunder” when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### “The mystery of God”<br><br>This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Simile<br><br>John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
 REV	10	1	xr6f			0	General Information:	John begins to describe a vision of a mighty angel holding a scroll. In John’s vision he is viewing what is happening from earth. This takes place between the blowing of the sixth and seventh trumpets.
 REV	10	1	jj2e	figs-metaphor	περιβεβλημένον νεφέλην	1	He was robed in a cloud	John speaks of the angel as if he were wearing **a cloud** as his clothing. This expression may be understood as metaphor. However, because very unusual things were often seen in visions, it might be understood as a literally true statement in its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	10	1	qax6	figs-simile	τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος	1	His face was like the sun	John compares the brightness of **his face** with the brightness of **the sun**. Alternate translation: “his face was bright like the sun” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -628,7 +631,7 @@ REV	11	19	c7pd	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἠνοίγη ὁ ναὸς τοῦ Θ
 REV	11	19	d9z7	figs-activepassive	ὤφθη ἡ κιβωτὸς τῆς διαθήκης τοῦ Κυρίου ἐν τῷ ναῷ αὐτοῦ	1	the ark of his covenant was seen within his temple	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I saw the ark of his covenant in his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 REV	11	19	b6ly		ἀστραπαὶ	1	flashes of lightning	Use your language’s way of describing what **lightning** looks like each time it appears. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md).
 REV	11	19	ap5g		φωναὶ, καὶ βρονταὶ	1	rumblings, crashes of thunder	Here, **loud sounds and crashes of thunder** refers to the loud noises that thunder makes. Use your language’s way of describing the sound of thunder. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md).
-REV	12	intro	cq7x			0		# Revelation 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Serpent<br><br>The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “A great sign was seen in heaven”<br><br>By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV	12	intro	cq7x			0		# Revelation 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Serpent<br><br>The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “A great sign was seen in heaven”<br><br>By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
 REV	12	1	n4ii			0	General Information:	John begins to describe a woman who appears in his vision.
 REV	12	1	j9yl	figs-activepassive	γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ ἡ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς	1	a woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a woman who was wearing the sun and had the moon under her feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 REV	12	3	y4c1			0	Connecting Statement:	John describes a dragon that appears in his vision.
@@ -749,7 +752,7 @@ REV	14	10	zl4g	writing-symlanguage	τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς α
 REV	14	11	dds6	figs-metonymy	ὁ καπνὸς τοῦ βασανισμοῦ αὐτῶν	1	The smoke from their torment	The phrase **their torment** refers to the fire that torments them. Alternate translation: “the smoke from the fire that torments them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	14	11	z5ea		οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἀνάπαυσιν	1	they have no rest	Alternate translation: “they have no relief” or “the torment does not stop”
 REV	14	12	me1j		ὧδε ἡ ὑπομονὴ τῶν ἁγίων ἐστίν	1	Here is the patient endurance of the saints	See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 13:10](../13/10.md).
-REV	14	12	wo34	figs-idiom	τηρούντων	1		See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV	14	12	wo34	figs-idiom	τηροῦντες	1		See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
 REV	14	13	x62q		οἱ νεκροὶ οἱ…ἀποθνῄσκοντες	1	the dead who die	Alternate translation: “those who die”
 REV	14	13	hy1a		οἱ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἀποθνῄσκοντες	1	who die in the Lord	This may refer to believers who are killed by their enemies. Alternate translation: “who are united to the Lord and die” or “who die because they are united to the Lord”
 REV	14	13	v4xz	figs-personification	τὰ…ἔργα αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	their deeds will follow them	These **deeds** are spoken of as if they were alive and able to **follow** those who did them. This could mean: (1) others will know the good deeds these people have done. (2) God will reward them for their deeds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -766,7 +769,7 @@ REV	14	20	xt4z		ἄχρι τῶν χαλινῶν τῶν ἵππων	1	up to th
 REV	14	20	m2i9		τῶν χαλινῶν	1	bridle	A **bridle** is device made of leather straps that goes around a horse’s head and is used for directing the horse.
 REV	14	20	gdl8	translate-numbers	σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων	1	1,600 stadia	Alternate translation: “one thousand six hundred stadia” or “sixteen hundred stadia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
 REV	14	20	dbz1	translate-bdistance	σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων	1		A “stadium” is 185 meters. The plural form of “stradium” is **stadia**. In modern measures this would be about “300 kilometers” or “200 miles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-REV	15	intro	zxt7			0		# Revelation 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Victorious over the beast”<br><br>These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”<br><br>Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### Songs<br><br>The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
+REV	15	intro	zxt7			0		# Revelation 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “Victorious over the beast”<br><br>These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”<br><br>Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### Songs<br><br>The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
 REV	15	1	p98c			0	General Information:	This verse is a summary of what will happen in 15:6-16:21.
 REV	15	1	l345	figs-doublet	μέγα καὶ θαυμαστόν	1	great and marvelous	The words **great** and **marvelous** have similar meanings and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “something that greatly amazed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
 REV	15	1	w6lf		ἀγγέλους ἑπτὰ ἔχοντας πληγὰς ἑπτὰ	1	seven angels with seven plagues	Alternate translation: “seven angels who had authority to send seven plagues on the earth”
@@ -843,7 +846,7 @@ REV	16	19	r2vh	figs-activepassive	Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη ἐμνήσθ
 REV	16	19	g6s8	writing-symlanguage	δοῦναι αὐτῇ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ	1	he gave that city the cup filled with the wine made from his furious wrath	Here, **the wine** is a symbol of his **wrath**. Making people drink it is a symbol of punishing them. Alternate translation: “he made the people of that city drink the wine that represents his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
 REV	16	20	byn4	figs-metonymy	ὄρη οὐχ εὑρέθησαν	1	the mountains were no longer found	The inability to see any **mountains** is metonymy expressing the idea that no mountains existed any longer. Alternate translation: “there were no longer any mountains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
 REV	16	21	i43r	translate-bweight	ταλαντιαία	1	a talent	You may convert the **talent** to a modern measure. Alternate translation: “33 kilograms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-REV	17	intro	ysn1			0		# Revelation 17 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Prostitute<br><br>Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>### Seven hills<br><br>This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up”<br><br>This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called “the one who is, and who was, and who is to come” elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: “the beast … is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings.” The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../rev/17/11.md))
+REV	17	intro	ysn1			0		# Revelation 17 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Prostitute<br><br>Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>### Seven hills<br><br>This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### “The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up”<br><br>This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called “the one who is, and who was, and who is to come” elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: “the beast … is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings.” The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../rev/17/11.md))
 REV	17	1	ppd7			0	General Information:	John begins to describe the part of his vision about the great prostitute.
 REV	17	1	c6f4	figs-abstractnouns	τὸ κρίμα τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης	1	the condemnation of the great prostitute	If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun “judgment”, you can express it with a verb. Alternate translation: “how God will judge the great prostitute” or “how God will condemn the great prostitute”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
 REV	17	1	f7ry	writing-symlanguage	τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης	1	the great prostitute	Here, **the great prostitute** represents a certain sinful city. Alternate translation: “the prostitute that everyone knows about” or “a certain sinful city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -892,7 +895,7 @@ REV	17	17	el9y	figs-activepassive	ἄχρι τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ
 REV	17	18	w2lu			0	Connecting Statement:	The angel finishes speaking to John about the prostitute and the beast.
 REV	17	18	md61	figs-metaphor	ἔστιν	1	is	Here, **is** stands for “represents.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	17	18	uy1m	figs-metonymy	ἡ πόλις ἡ μεγάλη, ἡ ἔχουσα βασιλείαν	1	the great city that rules	When it says that the **city** rules, it means that the leader of the city rules. Alternate translation: “the great city whose leader rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV	18	intro	j5qc			0		# Revelation 18 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Prophecy<br><br>The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV	18	intro	j5qc			0		# Revelation 18 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Prophecy<br><br>The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	18	1	xxe5			0	Connecting Statement:	Another angel comes down from heaven and speaks. This is a different angel than the one in the previous chapter, who spoke about the prostitute and the beast.
 REV	18	2	a2f5	figs-metaphor	ἔπεσεν, Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη	1	Fallen is Babylon the great	The angel speaks of **Babylon** having been destroyed as if it had fallen. See how you translated this in [Revelation 14:8](../14/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
 REV	18	2	fl3m	figs-personification	Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη	1		The angel speaks of the city of Babylon as if it were a prostitute. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -1159,4 +1162,4 @@ REV	22	18	jzu8		ἐάν τις ἐπιθῇ ἐπ’ αὐτά, ἐπιθήσε
 REV	22	18	d4sc	figs-activepassive	τὰς γεγραμμένας ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ	1	that are written about in this book	If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which I have written about in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
 REV	22	19	ss3y		ἐάν τις ἀφέλῃ ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τοῦ βιβλίου τῆς προφητείας ταύτης, ἀφελεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου τῆς ζωῆς καὶ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως τῆς ἁγίας, τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ	1	If anyone takes away … God will take away	This is a strong warning to not change anything about this prophecy.
 REV	22	20	u6mb			0	General Information:	In these verses John gives his and Jesus’ closing greetings.
-REV	22	20	y9p2		ὁ μαρτυρῶν	1	The one who testifies	Alternate translation: “Jesus, who testifies”
\ No newline at end of file
+REV	22	20	y9p2		ὁ μαρτυρῶν	1	The one who testifies	Alternate translation: “Jesus, who testifies”